Grand Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
2019 Grand Cherokee
Second Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
19WK-126-AB
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2019
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................133
5
SAFETY ........................................................................165
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................249
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................391
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................435
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................497
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................509
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................601
12
INDEX..........................................................................607
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION .........................4
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............5
▫ Essential Information ......................5
▫ Symbols ...............................5
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING .....................5
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................6
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .....6
1
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that are not intended for conventional pas-
senger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so
take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If
equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was
designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for
off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for
a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this
vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar
with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for brak-
ing, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting.
Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When
driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the
vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws
of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and
local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of
this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer
oriented documents. In the attached Warranty Booklet you
will find a description of the services that FCA offers to its
customers, the Warranty Certificate and the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please
take the time to read all of these publications carefully
before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warn-
ings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable
operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
4 INTRODUCTION
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
If applicable, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for
related information.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Rollover Warning Label
6 INTRODUCTION
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment 4 — Wheels/Tires
2 — Windshield 5 — Exterior Mirrors
3 — Headlights 6 — Doors
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Taillight
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 6 — Uconnect System
2 — Paddle Shifters 7 — Radio Controls
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Climate Controls
4 — Speed Controls 9 — Switch Panel
5 — Ignition Switch 10 — Glove Compartment
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Door Locks 4 — Seats
2 — Window Switches 5 — Gear Selector
3 — Door Handles 6 — Cupholders
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED .......18
䡵 KEYS .................................20
▫ KeyFob..............................20
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................25
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ..............25
▫ Vehicle On Message .....................27
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .28
▫ How To Use Remote Start..................29
▫ Remote Start Abort Message ................29
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ................30
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................30
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................30
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .31
▫ General Information .....................31
䡵 SENTRY KEY ............................31
▫ Key Programming ......................32
▫ Replacement Keys .......................32
▫ Irregular Operation ......................32
▫ General Information .....................33
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .33
▫ To Arm The System .....................34
▫ To Disarm The System ...................34
▫ Rearming Of The System ..................35
▫ Security System Manual Override ............35
▫ Tamper Alert ...........................35
䡵 DOORS ...............................35
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................35
3
▫ Power Door Locks ......................36
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .........37
▫ Locking The Doors With One Or More Doors
Open ................................41
▫ Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ............41
▫ Auto Relocking — If Equipped .............42
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System
— Rear Doors .........................42
䡵 SEATS ................................43
▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped .43
▫ Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) .............47
▫ Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . .49
▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ..........51
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ...............54
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .........57
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................58
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
Seats.................................58
▫ Adjustment — Rear Seats ..................61
▫ Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats .........61
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................63
▫ Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped .............................63
▫ Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped .............................64
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped.........64
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................66
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......66
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....66
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................67
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped .............................68
▫ Power Mirrors .........................68
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped. . .68
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............70
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped ...........70
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ................70
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................71
▫ Headlight Switch ........................71
▫ Multifunction Lever .....................72
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .......72
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ..................73
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ........73
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................73
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........74
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights ............74
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers .....74
▫ Headlight Delay ........................74
▫ Lights-On Reminder .....................75
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .................75
▫ Turn Signals ...........................76
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ..........76
▫ Battery Saver ..........................76
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................76
▫ Courtesy Lights ........................77
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ........79
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation................80
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ..........82
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...............84
䡵 HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED ......85
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................85
▫ Automatic Climate Controls Overview ........86
▫ Climate Control Functions .................92
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ........93
▫ Operating Tips .........................94
䡵 WINDOWS .............................96
▫ Power Window Controls ..................96
▫ Auto-Down Feature .....................97
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection ....97
▫ Reset Auto-Up..........................98
▫ Window Lockout Switch...................98
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................98
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..........99
▫ Opening Sunroof .......................99
▫ Closing Sunroof .......................100
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................100
▫ Sunshade Operation ....................100
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ....................101
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ...............101
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................101
▫ Relearn Procedure ......................101
䡵 COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED ..................102
▫ Opening Sunroof .......................103
▫ Closing Sunroof .......................103
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................104
▫ Opening Power Shade ...................104
▫ Closing Power Shade ....................104
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ....................105
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ...............105
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................105
䡵 HOOD ...............................106
▫ To Open The Hood .....................106
▫ To Close The Hood .....................106
䡵 LIFTGATE .............................107
▫ Opening .............................107
▫ Closing .............................108
▫ Power
Liftgate — If Equipped .............109
▫ Cargo Area Features ....................111
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ....114
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....114
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .......117
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using HomeLink .......................118
▫ Security..............................119
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ....................119
▫ General Information .....................120
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..................120
▫ Storage ..............................120
▫ Cupholders ..........................124
▫ Electrical Power Outlets ..................125
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped .............129
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door ....................130
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ......130
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through your
Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system — If
Equipped.
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touch-
screen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. From there, press
the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No
Uconnect registration is required.
NOTE: Vehicle User Guide features are not available while
the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle
is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available
while the vehicle is in motion.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Up-
dated in real-time
Available when and where
you need it
Touchscreen convenience Customizable interface
Maintenance schedules
and information
Multilingual
Comprehensive icon &
symbol glossary
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able
to explore your warranty information and radio manual
when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system
displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio
to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no
app to download, no phone to connect and no external
device needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout
the year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions Maintenance Schedules
Warranty Information Emergency Procedures
Fluid Level Standards 911 Contact and More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to
your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
• With ignition on/start and the vehicle moving at 5 mph
(8 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
Key Fob
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring
to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of
the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if
equipped, the security alarm will arm.
The turn signal lights will flash twice to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be acti-
vated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate.
Key Fob With Emergency Key
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
located in “Multimedia” for further programmable infor-
mation.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically
if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, other-
wise the doors will stay locked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for fur-
ther information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and pull the emergency key out with your other
hand.
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the emer-
gency key, a #2 flat blade screwdriver, or a coin and
gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Key Removal Separating Case With A Coin
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another ve-
hicle.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System ser-
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match the
vehicle locks.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in posi-
tion. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• The engine will start.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
START/STOP Ignition Button
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Starting The Engine,⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to
the chime, the message will display “Ignition Or Accessory
On” in the cluster.
NOTE: The power window switches and power sunroof (if
equipped) will remain active up to ten minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine in
the OFF position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above
80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats, and optional
heated steering wheel in temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C).
Refer to “Seats” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within
five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third
time shuts the engine off.
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes (time out) unless the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be manually started with a push of the
ignition START/STOP button after two consecutive time
outs.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
• Remote Start Aborted Timer Expired
• Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active until
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock
the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via
the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument
cluster display until you push the ignition START button.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Auto Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect system. For more infor-
mation on Comfort System operation, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key
fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is
used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Programming
Key fob programming is performed at an authorized
dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
Irregular Operation
The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node Module,
Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to
crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds
if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition
in the ON/RUN mode, the Vehicle Security Light will turn
on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem
with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash
after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an
invalid key fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
• The horn will pulse.
• The turn signals will flash.
• The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the “OFF”
mode.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make sure
the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Doors⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know
Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to unlock the door,
refer to ⬙Doors⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to disarm the
system.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm, regardless of whether you are in
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after 29 seconds, five seconds between cycles, up to eight
cycles if the trigger remains active and the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
The power door locks can be manually locked from inside
the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door,
push the door lock knob on each door trim panel down-
ward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the
door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will lock.
Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE: Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
vehicle security alarm.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the keys are
found inside the car when door lock button on trim is used
to lock the door.
NOTE: If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless signal may
get blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock auto-
matically.
At the third attempt, the doors will lock even if the key is
inside.
Power Door Lock Switch
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in
ACC or ON/RUN and the driver’s door is open, the doors
will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside the
vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be
unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and unlock
the vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without having to push
the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
passive entry system from locking/unlocking the ve-
hicle.
• Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(Low Beams, License Plate Lamp, Position Lamps) for
whichever time duration is set between 0, 30 (default),
60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Driver Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati-
cally.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in
any passive entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
• When the vehicle security alarm is in pre-arm or armed
status and the liftgate transitions from open to closed.
• When the liftgate transitions from opened to closed and
remote start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the follow-
ing conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles,
pushing the passive entry lock button will lock the vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the
key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in Vehicle⬙ remains
active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located on the
outside liftgate door handle.
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Locking The Doors With One Or More Doors Open
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in
ACC or ON/RUN and the driver’s door is open, the doors
will not lock.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks after the following sequence of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
Auto Relocking — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/
disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make certain
it is in the desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull up on
the door lock knob (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
NOTE: Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be sure to
check that there is no one left inside.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted forward or rear-
ward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion,
near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the
seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Adjustment Bar
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured
or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is
parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be
severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only when
the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the out-
board side of the seat, lean back and release the lever at the
desired position. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
Rear Seat Recline
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
NOTE:
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
Rear Seat Release
Rear Seat Folded
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children when
the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously
injured in a collision. Children should be seated and
using the proper restraint system.
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch; the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar
support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic
steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your key fob can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the unlock button is
pushed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other
key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
Power Lumbar Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of
two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station pre-
sets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster dis-
play will display which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
Memory Seat Switch
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Before programming your key fobs you must select
the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the
set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10
seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key
fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push memory button (1) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, push memory button (2) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 2.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by pushing any of the
seat adjustment switches. When a recall is canceled, the
driver’s seat and steering column (if equipped) stop mov-
ing. A delay of one second will occur before another recall
can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehi-
cle’s ignition to the OFF position.
•
When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
(Continued)
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI,
and one for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
• The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
• Push the switch
once to turn the HI setting on.
• Push the switch
a second time to turn the LO
setting on.
• Push the switch
a third time to turn the heating
elements off.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to turn
the ventilated seat off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the venti-
lated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear-impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front
Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection
of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR)
will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft
foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or
front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-
mation.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
Adjustment Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the
head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint,
refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Safety” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustment — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust-
able. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is
folded to a load floor position, but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After return-
ing either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head re-
straints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward
on the head restraint to lower it.
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats
The center head restraint can be adjusted when occupied,
or removed for Child Seat Tethering. To remove the head
restraint, raise it as far as it can go by pulling upward.
Then, push the release button at the base of the post while
pulling the head restraint upward. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head re-
straints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
Folded Rear Head Restraint
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Center Head Restraint Release Button
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering col-
umn lever is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your key fob or the memory switch on the
driver’s door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steer-
ing column to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the
operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not
turn on when it is already warm.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The heated steering wheel control button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the touchscreen and
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn
the heating element on.
• Push the heated steering wheel button
a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s
rear view.
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at
the base of the mirror. A light in the button will illuminate
to indicate when the dimming feature is activated.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Automatic Dimming Mirror Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the
inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will auto-
matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want
to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror
to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located be-
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the
switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the
normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a
potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors
back to the home position. If the mirror does not electri-
cally fold, check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area
which can cause excessive drag.
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is enabled, the
exterior mirrors will fold in when exiting the vehicle (the
ignition is OFF, all doors are closed, and the doors are
locked).
• If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they will unfold
when the ignition is turned ON.
• If the exterior mirrors were manually folded, they will
not automatically unfold.
NOTE: The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Automatic
Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory seat
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun blockage.
NOTE: The sun visor blade can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight
switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights, and fog lights
(if equipped).
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
Headlight Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less sus-
ceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not
as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens
cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
• If a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same
side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the
turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer
active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Multifunction Lever
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• The DRL function may be disabled through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multi-
function back toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera de-
tects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto High
Beam” within your Uconnect settings, as well as turning
the headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See a local authorized dealer.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (auto) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is also
on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90
seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the A (auto) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O
(off) position.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati-
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
stop.
Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the day-
time, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to
the lower nighttime intensity.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch
is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
• The headlight delay feature is automatically activated if
the headlight switch is left in the A (auto) position when
the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An
indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illu-
minate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn
off when the switch is pushed a second time, when the
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the high
beam is selected.
Fog Light Operation
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defec-
tive.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes
or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome
on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automati-
cally turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for
eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is equipped
with remote keyless entry and the unlock button is pushed
on the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will turn on.
When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating
the dimmer control all the way down, to the last (off)
detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out. This is
also known as the “Party” mode because it allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
console.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a second
time. The lights will also turn on when the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry key fob is pushed.
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
of the floor and center console area.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Ambient Light
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the instrument cluster dis-
play, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to
its farthest position up until you hear a click. This feature
is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when head-
lights are required during the day.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever. For information on the rear
wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in
this section.
Dimmer Control
Multifunction Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds
above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles
(first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
Windshield Wiper Operation
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward the
steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of
the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the
off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occa-
sional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end of the
lever downward to the MIST position and release for a
single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensi-
tive.
NOTE: Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF
position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
tion is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper
operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other
inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multi-
function lever on the left side of the steering column. The
rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located
at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more will
activate the washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release of the
switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper
operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF position,
rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump
which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held.
Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF
position and the wipers will cycle several times before
returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED
The multifunction lever operates the headlight washers
when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the
headlights are turned on. The multifunction lever is located
on the left side of the steering column.
To use the headlight washers, push the multifunction lever
inward (toward the steering column) and release it. The
headlight washers will spray a timed high-pressure spray
of washer fluid onto each headlight lens. In addition, the
windshield washers will spray the windshield and the
windshield wipers will cycle.
NOTE: After turning the ignition switch and headlights
ON, the headlight washers will operate on the first spray of
the windshield washer and then every eleventh spray after
that.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel
below the radio.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Automatic Climate Controls Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change
the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can
be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recir-
culation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and auto-
matic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illu-
minates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist out-
lets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
The Rear Defrost Control button turns on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button
on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the face-
plate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Icon Description
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger tem-
perature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature set-
ting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Mode Control Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow dis-
tribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Icon Description
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passen-
ger temperature control buttons. Once the desired tem-
perature is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
(Continued)
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
If equipped, the key fob may also be used to raise or lower
vehicle windows while the ignition is in the “OFF” posi-
tion. Refer to “Keys” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the front and
rear passenger doors window switches have an Auto-
Down feature.
Push the window switch down for half a second and
release. The window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the
switch briefly.
To open the window part way (manually), push the
window switch down briefly and release.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of time, and
release and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold
to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (the indicator light on
the button with turn on). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn back off).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Window Lockout Switch
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Opening Sunroof
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Manual
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the move-
ment. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruc-
tion in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a single-pane sunroof, there is
a relearn procedure that allows you to reset the sunroof
when the “Express Open” feature stops working. To reset
the sunroof, follow these steps:
1. Set the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Make sure that the sunroof is fully closed.
3. Push sunroof switch forward and hold. The sunroof will
close fully then move to the Vent position after 10
seconds.
4. Release the sunroof switch, then push forward and hold
the switch again within 5 seconds to begin the relearn
process. The sunroof will complete one full cycle and
return to the Fully Closed position.
NOTE: If the sunroof switch is released anytime during the
relearn cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated
starting from the first step.
5. Once the sunroof has stopped in the Fully Closed
position, release the sunroof switch. The sunroof is now
reset and ready to use.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE
— IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between the
sun visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops for the
sunroof open position; a comfort stop position and a full
open position. The comfort stop position has been opti-
mized to minimize wind buffeting.
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof will open automatically to the comfort
stop position. Push the switch rearward and release it
again, the sunroof will open to the full open position and
automatically stop. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop
position. Push and hold the switch rearward again, the
sunroof will open to the full open position and automati-
cally stop. Any release of the switch will stop the move-
ment. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the sun-
shade will automatically open to the half open position
prior to the sunroof opening.
Closing Sunroof
Express Close
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. During Express Close operation, any other actua-
tion of the sunroof switches will stop the sunroof in a
partially open position.
Manual Close
Push and hold the switch forward and the sunroof will
close from any position and stop at full closed position.
Releasing the switch while the sunroof is in motion will
stop the sunroof in a partially open position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Opening Power Shade
The sunshade has two programmed positions: half open
and full open positions. When operating the sunshade
from the closed position, the sunshade will always stop at
the half open position regardless of express or manual
open operation. The switch must be actuated again to
continue on to full open position.
Express Open
Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second, the sunshade will open to the half open
position and stop automatically. Push and release the
switch again from the half open position and the sunshade
will open to the full open position and stop automatically.
During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the
sunroof switches will stop the sunshade in a partially open
position.
Manual Open
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the sun-
shade will open to the half open position and stop auto-
matically. Push and hold the sunshade switch again and
the sunshade will open to the full open position. Releasing
the switch while the sunshade is in motion will stop the
sunshade in a partially open position.
Closing Power Shade
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot be
closed beyond the half open position. Pushing the sun-
shade close switch when the sunroof is open/vented and
the sunshade is at half open position will first automati-
cally close the sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Express Close
Push the sunshade switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunshade will close automatically.
During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the
sunroof switches will stop the sunshade in a partially open
position.
Manual Close
Push and hold the switch forward and the sunshade will
close and stop at full closed position. Releasing the switch
while the sunshade is in motion will stop the sunshade in
a partially open position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
HOOD
To Open The Hood
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel
and in front of the driver’s door.
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left and
lift the hood.
To Close The Hood
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert
it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from
the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the
hood is completely closed.
Hood Release
Safety Latch Location
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
The liftgate can be opened from inside the vehicle using the
power liftgate button on the overhead console, using the
key fob outside of the vehicle or the electronic liftgate
release.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
• Key fob
• Outside handle
• Button on overhead console
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. Push the
button on the key fob twice within five seconds to release
the liftgate.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
the instrument cluster display, all doors will unlock when
you push the electronic release on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect, only
the liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic
release on the liftgate. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: Use the power door lock switch on either front
door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the
liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the
driver’s door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen-
gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Closing
To manually close the liftgate, grasp the liftgate closing
handle and initiate the lowering of the liftgate. Release the
handle when the liftgate is partially closed and the mo-
mentum will fully close the liftgate.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
lock button located to the left of the outside handle release
will lock the vehicle.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release 2 — Lock Button Location
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the button,
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Pushing button will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the elec-
tronic liftgate release.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion), or by pushing the liftgate button on the key fob. Push
the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds
to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open,
pushing the button twice within five seconds a second time
will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the front overhead
console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be
closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear
trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in
motion, pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear
trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash to signal that the liftgate is
opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in
the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will be
audible. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in ⬙Multimedia” for
further information.
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the
liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate
trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the
liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power
liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE:
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150° F
(65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate
switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically re-
verse to the closed or open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will
cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the liftgate button
on the key fob twice to operate the liftgate.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disen-
gage to allow manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Storage Bins
There are up to four removable storage bins located in the
rear cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either
side of the cargo area.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer,
the storage bin on that side will not be available.
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether strap (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
Rear Storage Bin
Tether Strap
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Rear Lower Storage Bins
Rear Cargo Cover
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve-
hicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
(Continued)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING! (Continued)
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink
unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on the overhead console,
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identi-
fied by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE: It is NOT the button that is normally used to open
and close the door. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.⬙
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Press and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non-
Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button, while
you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment
in the open position. Driving with the glove compart-
ment open may result in injury in a collision.
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Console Features
The center console contains both an upper and a lower
storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
Storage Compartment
Storage Compartment Latches
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower
storage compartment.
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player
located in the center console.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Lower Storage Compartment
Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player — If
Equipped
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
Overhead Console
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink), power liftgate and power sunroof switches
may also be included, if equipped.
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console.
Overhead Console
Front Cupholders
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Electrical Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
Rear Cupholders
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on
the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward on
the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to
this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area.
Center Console Outlet
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched from
switched “ignition” only to constant “battery” powered all
the time. See your local authorized dealer for details.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts.
NOTE: Certain high-end video game consoles, new com-
puters and power tools will exceed this power limit.
Power Inverter
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console, a compartment is provided for
storing a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment
access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad on
the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to close.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load
must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install Mopar crossbars built specifi-
cally for this roof rack system.
Sunglasses Bin Door
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside
the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns
using the anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in the desired position, retighten the with the
wrench to lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in
use, place the front and rear crossbars approximately 24
inches (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction can then
be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or
aft using increments of 1 inch (2.5 cm).
• If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed over the
satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may experi-
ence interruption of satellite radio reception. For im-
proved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear
crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the ve-
hicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cau-
tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do not
carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars
installed. The load should be secured and placed on
top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place a
blanket or some other protection between the load
and the roof surface.
(Continued)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
• The use of Sport Mode is not recommended when
using the Roof Luggage Rack to carry a load.
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................134
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions.............135
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........136
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .............................136
▫ Oil Change Reset — If Equipped ...........138
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages ........139
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ......141
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions (If Equipped) .146
䡵 TRIP COMPUTER .......................148
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........149
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................149
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................153
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights ...................158
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................159
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................160
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................161
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .161
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................162
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................163
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driver-
interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they are
not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
scroll through the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display is located in the center of
the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Main Menu items selectable in the driver interactive
display consist of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Terrain — If Equipped
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display
1 — Driver Interactive Display
2 — Speedometer Display
3 — Main Display
4 — Menu Name And Menu Page
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indi-
cator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
100%.
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
Includes the following, but not limited to:
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Traction Control Off
• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Anti-lock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Power Steering
• Cruise Control Off
• Cruise Control Ready
• ACC Driver Override
• Cruise Control Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Speed Warning Set To XXX MPH
• Speed Warning Exceeded
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Lights On
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Ignition Or Accessory On
• Vehicle Not In Park
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button — If Equipped
• Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low — If Equipped
• Remote Start Canceled Too Cold — If Equipped
• Remote Start Canceled Door Open — If Equipped
• Remote Start Canceled Hood Open — If Equipped
• Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open — If Equipped
• Remote Start Canceled Time Expired — If Equipped
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset — If Equipped
• Service Air Bag System
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Liftgate Open
• Hood Open
• Shift Not Allowed
• Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To D
• Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To R
• Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P
• Service Transmission
• Service Shifter
• Service Air Suspension System
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
• Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
For further information on the color warning and indicator
lights in the instrument cluster, refer to “Warning Lights
And Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel”.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the up and
down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver interactive
display menu options until the desired menu is reached.
NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature set-
tings may vary.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
main gauge menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow
button to select the analog or digital type speedometer
display. Push and release the OK button to toggle units
(mph or km/h) of the speedometer.
Accessibility — If Equipped
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray system that
announces a function prior to performing the action. For
further information refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia.”
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow
button to scroll through the information submenus and
push and release the OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus.
• Tire Pressure • Oil Pressure
• Transmission
Temperature
• Oil Life
• Oil Temperature • Battery Voltage
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Terrain — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Terrain icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right or left arrow button to
display the Selec-Terrain, Air Suspension, Drivetrain, and
Wheel Articulation.
• Selec-Terrain: Displays messages concerning Selec-
Terrain status.
• Air Suspension — If Equipped: Displays messages con-
cerning Air Suspension status.
• Drivetrain: Displays information on drivetrain status of
Front Wheel Angle, T-Case, and Axle Lock.
• Wheel Articulation: Displays current wheel articulation.
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
and LaneSense system settings. The information displayed
depends on the status of ACC and LaneSense.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• Distance Setting Change
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE: The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current Lane-
Sense system settings. The information displayed depends
on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to
be met. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy Icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and hold the OK button to reset average fuel
economy feature.
Toggle left or right to select a display with or without
Current Fuel Economy Information.
• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi
or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in
the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles
(48 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display
will change to a “RANGE LOW” message. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
“RANGE LOW” message and a new Range value will
display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
• Average – The display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.
• Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip
A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the follow-
ing:
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip
B since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button on
the steering wheel to scroll to the Stop/Start menu
in the driver interactive display. This menu will give access
to Stop/Start settings using the left and right arrow
buttons on the steering wheel.
For further information on the use and different modes of
the Stop/Start System accessible through these settings,
refer to “Stop/Start System – If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating”.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button
will allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instru-
ment cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen
as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Gear Display
• Full (default setting)
• Single
Upper Left
• None
• Compass (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Time
• Range
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
• Cancel
• Restore
Current Gear
• On
• Off (default setting)
Favorite Menus — Equipped
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Terrain (show/hide)
• Driver Assist (show/hide)
• Fuel Economy (show/hide)
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
• Trip Info (show/hide)
• Stop/Start
• Audio (show/hide)
• Messages
• Screen Setup
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press OK
button to choose show or hide this menu on the instrument
cluster display.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions (If Equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Warning Lights And Mes-
sages” located in ”Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 150W Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports) dur-
ing certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
vices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
150W, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
sage is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip
B). Push and release the OK button to display the Trip
information.
Trip A
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is selected
(highlighted). Push and hold the OK button to clear the
resettable function being displayed.
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information
in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active
telltales will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon equipment options
and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open
and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil
temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high
transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly
faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light
This light will turn on when the ACC system is not
operating and needs service. For further information, refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And
Operating.”
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Sta-
bility Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense
system is not operating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
— LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when
the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light
will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap
is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light.
If the light does not turn off, please see an authorized
dealer.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L)
this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warn-
ing.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the
4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. We recommend you
drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
— Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Refer to ⬙Forward Collision Warning (FCW)⬙ in ⬙Safety⬙ for
further information.
— Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start
system is not functioning properly and service is required.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Air Suspension Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is
actively adjusting the ride height.
— Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light— If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle is automatically
lowered from ride height position downward for easy
entry and exit of the vehicle.
— Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator
Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is
set to the Aerodynamic setting.
— Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is
set to the Off-Road 1 setting.
— Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is
set to the Off-Road 2 setting.
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward
Collision Warning is off.
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear drive-
shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased
torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information on four-
wheel drive operation and proper use.
— NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD power transfer
case is in the NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
driveshafts are disengaged from the powertrain.
Green Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is
set and there is no target vehicle detected. Refer to ⬙Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle
is detected. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start
function is in “Autostop” mode.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on, but
not set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is
in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met
while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indi-
cator light will flash on/off.
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the
LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This
occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control has been
turned on, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
— Selec Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec Speed Control” is
activated.
To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the vehicle is
Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and push the button on the
Instrument Panel.
NOTE: If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................166
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............166
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............167
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............181
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .181
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation ...........................189
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........192
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........198
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .........198
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............198
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................200
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........212
▫ Child Restraints .......................225
▫ Transporting Pets ......................244
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................245
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................245
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................245
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................246
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................248
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
166 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill De-
scent Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
5
SAFETY 167
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is re-
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
168 SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
5
SAFETY 169
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within 20
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
170 SAFETY
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
5
SAFETY 171
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
172 SAFETY
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Mul-
tiple momentary button pushed may be required to return
to ESC On.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
5
SAFETY 173
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
174 SAFETY
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow-
ing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It antici-
pates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interac-
tion is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and
Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides
torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to
help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
applied to the steering wheel.
5
SAFETY 175
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity
and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling ve-
hicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed
for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not
activate.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
176 SAFETY
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by
the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,
is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
5
SAFETY 177
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is re-
sponsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling
engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling ve-
hicle speed).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the follow-
ing conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
178 SAFETY
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.
• Driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the
following conditions are met:
• Driver releases throttle.
• Driver releases brake.
• Transmission is in any selection other than P.
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC
set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and the
level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of
grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. While actively controlling SSC the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected
set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
5
SAFETY 179
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch
has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the
state SSC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for SSC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC
switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extin-
guish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
180 SAFETY
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar
sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motor-
cycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE.
Rear Detection Zones
5
SAFETY 181
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the side of the vehicle, near the B-Pillar, and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-
tion zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in random false detec-
tions on the trailer, and false chimes when the turn
signal is used.
• The BSM system may experience drop outs (blinking on
and off) of the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more
than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function prop-
erly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
182 SAFETY
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors. In addition, when the turn
signal is activated during the alert on the side of the vehicle
corresponding to the alert, an audible (chime) alert can be
heard. During this audible (chime) alert, the radio volume
will be reduced. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” in this
section for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Warning Light Location
Side Monitoring
5
SAFETY 183
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
184 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects
5
SAFETY 185
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 5 mph
Opposing Traffic
RCP Detection Zones
186 SAFETY
(8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, includ-
ing reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
5
SAFETY 187
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
188 SAFETY
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) with Mitigation
system provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited brak-
ing are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progres-
sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level
of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warn-
ing with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
FCW Message
5
SAFETY 189
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range or
ESC Full-Off Mode is active, the FCW system will be
automatically deactivated.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are pro-
grammable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
190 SAFETY
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible colli-
sion.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in
the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows
for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
• Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
5
SAFETY 191
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour
period. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning thresh-
old for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold
tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the
recommended cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to be turned off.
192 SAFETY
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pres-
sures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning
Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to
the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
5
SAFETY 193
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
194 SAFETY
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the instrument cluster, and a graphic
displaying tire pressures
• TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be
activated, when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message
and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low
tire(s) in a different color. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units in
PSI, BAR or kPa.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate
the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
SAFETY 195
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display
of the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and
the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the updated
tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
to receive this information.
Service TPM System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The instrument cluster display will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five
seconds. This message is then followed by a graphic
display, with “- -“ in place of the pressure value(s),
indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not
being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
196 SAFETY
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will remain on, a chime
will sound, and the instrument cluster display will still
display a pressure value in the different color graphic
display and an “Inflate to XX” message will be displayed.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster display
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle,
a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster display will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five sec-
onds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
display will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deac-
tivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road
tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and
tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster
will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
5
SAFETY 197
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer be dis-
played as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
198 SAFETY
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) must be secured in the appro-
priate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a
rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
5
SAFETY 199
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
200 SAFETY
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 201
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
202 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
5
SAFETY 203
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
204 SAFETY
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of
the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
5
SAFETY 205
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
206 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 207
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
208 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
5
SAFETY 209
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable components,
and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily iden-
tified by any markings, only through visual inspection of
the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the
Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not
deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if
during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the
AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seat Back
210 SAFETY
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint, ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Re-
straint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Head Restraints” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a colli-
sion, the front half of the head restraint will be extended
forward and separated from the rear half of the head
restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle after the
AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must be reset into
the original position to best protect the occupant for all
types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must
reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs
may result in damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
5
SAFETY 211
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
212 SAFETY
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn-
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
5
SAFETY 213
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Knee Air Bag
214 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
5
SAFETY 215
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
216 SAFETY
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
5
SAFETY 217
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
218 SAFETY
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
5
SAFETY 219
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
220 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
5
SAFETY 221
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
222 SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
reset the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
5
SAFETY 223
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
224 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
5
SAFETY 225
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–
327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
226 SAFETY
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Re-
straints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
5
SAFETY 227
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
228 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
5
SAFETY 229
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
230 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 231
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach the child re-
straint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seat-
ing position.
232 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH an-
chorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint own-
er’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes The head restraint may be removed
in only the center seating position if
it interferes with the installation of
the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in Getting
To Know Your Vehicle for further
information.
5
SAFETY 233
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor panel
away from the seat back, this will expose the top
tether strap anchorages.
LATCH Anchorages
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
234 SAFETY
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not ap-
proved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
5
SAFETY 235
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap
located on the front of the arm rest.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
236 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
5
SAFETY 237
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
(Continued)
238 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 239
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes The head restraint may be removed
in only the center seating position if
it interferes with the installation of
the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retrac-
tor.
240 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5
SAFETY 241
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
242 SAFETY
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On Seatback)
5
SAFETY 243
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
244 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
5
SAFETY 245
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
246 SAFETY
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 247
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
248 SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE — GAS ............253
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................253
▫ Normal Starting ........................254
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................257
▫ Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) ..............................258
▫ After Starting..........................258
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .258
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
— 3.6L & 5.7L ENGINES ..................259
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................260
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............262
▫ Ignition Park Interlock ...................263
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .263
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode ...............264
▫ Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission ........264
䡵 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED .............272
䡵 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ..........273
▫ Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/Precautions
— If Equipped ........................273
▫ Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/Precautions
— If Equipped ........................273
▫ Shift Positions .........................274
▫ Shifting Procedures .....................275
▫ Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped .......279
䡵 QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED ............279
▫ Description ...........................279
▫ Air Suspension Modes ...................282
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages .........283
▫ Operation ............................283
6
䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED ...........285
▫ Selec-Terrain Mode Selection ...............285
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages .........286
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF
EQUIPPED .............................286
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................286
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED........287
▫ Automatic Mode .......................287
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ............................288
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . .289
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .289
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .290
▫ System Malfunction .....................290
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........290
▫ To Activate ...........................291
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ..................291
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................291
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................292
▫ To Resume Speed ......................293
▫ To Deactivate .........................293
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................293
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .....295
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .....296
▫ To Activate/Deactivate ...................296
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed...............297
▫ To Cancel ............................297
▫ ToTurnOff...........................298
▫ To Resume ...........................298
▫ T
o Vary The Speed Setting ................299
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC .......301
▫ Overtake Aid ..........................303
▫ ACC Operation At Stop ..................304
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........304
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance .........305
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC.........307
▫ General Information .....................310
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .311
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED ........................313
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................315
▫ ParkSense Display ......................315
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................319
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........319
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .320
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............320
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........320
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED .............................322
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................323
▫ ParkSense Display ......................324
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................328
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........329
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System .....329
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............330
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........330
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED ........................332
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System ......................333
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display ......................334
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display ......................343
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..............352
▫ LaneSense
Operation ....................352
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off ..............353
▫ LaneSense Warning Message ...............354
▫ Changing LaneSense Status ................357
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........357
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE ..............................359
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ..........361
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................362
▫ Certification Label ......................362
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................364
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............364
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ................366
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .............................367
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal (Summit
Models) — If Equipped ..................368
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............369
▫ Towing Requirements ...................370
▫ Towing Tips ..........................374
䡵 SNOW PLOW ..........................375
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................376
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .376
▫ Recreational Towing — Two Wheel Drive
Models ..............................377
▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I (Single-Speed
Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive Models ......378
▫ Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/Quadra–
Drive II Four-Wheel Drive Models...........378
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................382
▫ On-Road Driving Tips ...................382
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips ...................383
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GAS
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
• Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF mode, key fob is removed from the vehicle and
vehicle is locked.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle
speed.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle stopped)
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the transmission will automatically select PARK and the
engine will turn off, however the ignition will remain in
the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the START/
STOP button once will turn the engine off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the
engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode
(NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when
the transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE: The system will automatically time out and the
ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine
not running) mode and the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driv-
er’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC mode (instrument cluster will
display “ACC”),
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN mode (instrument
cluster will display “ON/RUN”),
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument cluster
will display “OFF”).
NOTE: Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could be re-
duced if both pedals are pressed at the same time. If
pressure is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a
warning message will display in the instrument cluster. For
further information, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. If the ⴖPⴖ
indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not de-
signed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into
PARK. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE: For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will
turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode.
After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automati-
cally, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may Au-
toPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift
to Gear”will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the
shifter must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P”will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the ve-
hicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A vehicle
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver’s Door is ajar
The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Not Engaged” will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will
continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the
Driver’s Door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the ⬙P⬙ in the instrument cluster
display and on the shifter. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙ or ⬙Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedure it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case
the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the RUN
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Nor-
mal Starting” procedure.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — 3.6L &
5.7L ENGINES
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in ⬙Technical Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check your
oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the
break in period. Add oil as required.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON mode, the Brake Warning Light in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the park-
ing brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
NOTE: The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the engine will
be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the
ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the
vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must
also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle’s
overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions.
Push the “ECO” switch in the center stack of the instru-
ment panel to activate or disable ECO mode. A light on the
switch indicates when ECO mode is disabled.
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The overall driving performance will be more conserva-
tive.
• Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension will operate in
⬙Aero⬙ mode over a broader speed range. Refer to the
section on Quadra-Lift for further information.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib-
ited based on temperature and other factors.
Active Noise Cancellation — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation
System. This system uses four microphones embedded in
the headliner to detect undesirable exhaust noise, which
sometimes occurs when operating in specific driving con-
ditions such as ECO and Tow mode. An onboard frequency
generator creates counteracting sound waves through the
audio system to help keep the vehicle quiet.
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To
shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or mov-
ing at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is re-
turned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift posi-
tions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
DRIVE position), or tapping the shift paddles (+/-), if
equipped, will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster.
Refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further information.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward),
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake,
• Shift the transmission into PARK,
• Turn the ignition OFF and,
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
(Continued)
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK
position (when pushed forward), it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector
to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Op-
erating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or be-
low), transmission operation may be modified depending
on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion) enables full manual control of transmission shifting
(also known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired loca-
tion (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driv-
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the
MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position), or tap
one of the shift paddles on the steering wheel (if equipped).
Tapping the (-) shift paddle (if equipped) to enter
AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode
will retain the current gear. The current transmission gear
will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick
mode, you can use the gear selector (in the MANUAL
position), or the shift paddles (if equipped), to manually
shift the transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-)
while in the MANUAL (M) position, or tapping the (-) shift
paddle (if equipped), will downshift the transmission to
the next lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward (+) (or
tapping the (+) shift paddle, if equipped) will command an
upshift.
NOTE: The shift paddles (if equipped) may be disabled (or
re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect Personal Set-
tings.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the
gear selector, or the shift paddles, if equipped), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or down-
shift is chosen, except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear (or
third gear, in 4LO range, Snow mode, or Sand mode).
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or
holding the gear selector in the (-) position, will down-
shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE: When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is en-
abled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if
equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until
⬙D⬙ is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You
can shift in or out of AutoStick at any time without taking
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems are
all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide
improved throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount
of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deacti-
vated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel
switch bank.
Sport Mode Button
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/Precautions
— If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only) trans-
fer case, which provides convenient full-time four-wheel
drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake Traction
Control (BTC) System, which combines standard ABS and
Traction Control, provides resistance to any wheel that is
slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with
traction.
NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for
conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended. Refer
to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating”
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/Precautions
— If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the
normal driving 4WD AUTO mode. The Quadra-Trac II
transfer case provides three mode positions:
• 4WD HI
• NEUTRAL
• 4WD LOW
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW
position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOW
position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased
tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD HI
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disen-
gages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel,
sand, and dry hard pavement.
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” further on
in this section for further information on the various
positions and their intended usages.
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. It
is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer
to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL position without first fully engaging the park-
ing brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disen-
gages both the front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an
additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slip-
pery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for further
information on the various positions and their intended
usages.
Shifting Procedures
4WDHITo4WDLOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into “N”, and push the “4WD LOW”
button once on the transfer case switch. The “4WD LOW”
indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash
and remain on solid when the shift is complete.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection condition ex-
ists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans
in “N” Press 4 Low” message will flash from the instru-
ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD
LOW” button once on the transfer case switch. The “4WD
LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
and go out when the shift is complete.
Transfer Case Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a transfer
case motor temperature protection condition exists, a
“For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in
N push 4 Low” message will flash from the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph
(0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow the shift.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages
both the front and rear drive shafts from the pow-
ertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension,
ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located
by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light
behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating
shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A
“NEUTRAL” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the transmission
back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL,
push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine turns off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK. Release
the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button twice (without
pressing the brake pedal), to turn the ignition to the
OFF mode.
14. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely attached to a tow vehicle.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Own-
er’s Manual” message will flash from the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located
by the selector switch) for one second.
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive II System features two torque
transfer couplings. The couplings include an Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-
Trac II transfer case. The optional ELSD axle is fully
automatic and requires no driver input to operate. Under
normal driving conditions, the unit functions as a standard
axle, balancing torque evenly between left and right
wheels. With a traction difference between left and right
wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference. As one
wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque will
automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction,
to the wheel that has traction. While the transfer case and
axle coupling differ in design, their operation is similar.
Follow the Quadra-Trac II transfer case shifting informa-
tion, preceding this section, for shifting this system.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
Description
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides full time
load leveling capability along with the benefit of vehicle
height adjustment by the push of a button. The vehicle will
automatically raise and lower the ride height to adapt to
the appropriate driving conditions. At higher speeds, the
vehicle will lower to an aerodynamic ride height and when
operating in off-road modes, the vehicle will raise the ride
height accordingly. The buttons near the terrain switch in
the center console area can be used to set preferred ride
height to match the appropriate conditions.
Selec-Terrain Switch
1 — UP Button
2 — DOWN Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately
1.1 inches (28 mm)) – This is the primary position for all
off-road driving until OR2 is needed. A smoother and
more comfortable ride will result. Push the “UP” button
once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is
below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if
the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle
will be automatically lowered to NRH. Refer to “Driving
Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately
2.2 inches (55 mm)) – This position is intended for
off-roading use only where maximum ground clearance
is required. To enter OR2, push the “UP” button twice
from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While
in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to OR1.
Refer to “Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
0.6 inches (15 mm)) – This position provides improved
aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will
automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed
remains between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph
(90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle
speed exceeds 56 mph (90 km/h). The vehicle will return
to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains
between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for
greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
below 20 mph (32 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero
Mode, regardless of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in
“SPORT” mode.
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
1.6 inches (40 mm) – This position lowers the vehicle for
easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the
rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the “DOWN”
button once from (NRH) while the vehicle speed is
below 25 mph (40 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes
below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60
seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)
the Entry/Exit Mode change will be cancelled. To exit
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up” button once while in
Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle over 15 mph
(24 km/h).
NOTE: Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit
Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch-Screen
Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will only lower
if the gear selector is in ⬙PARK⬙, the terrain switch is in
⬙AUTO⬙, the transfer-case is in ⬙AUTO” and the vehicle
level should be either in Normal or Aero Mode. The Vehicle
will not automatically lower if the air suspension level is in
Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle is equipped with
Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the lowering will be sup-
pressed when the ignition is switched OFF and the door is
open to prevent setting the alarm off.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the proper height based on the position of the
Selec-Terrain switch. The height can be changed from the
default Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air
suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
The system requires that the engine be running for all
changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,
including the liftgate, must be closed. If a door is opened at
any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not
be completed until the open door(s) is/are closed.
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a lifting and
lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incor-
rectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the
vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then
the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will move
down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air
suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The
system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a
proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the Quadra-Lift air
suspension system has a feature which allows the auto-
matic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
For further information refer to “Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” section.
NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done through
the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure vol-
ume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see your authorized
dealer for service.
Air Suspension Modes
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect
the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to
be disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the air
suspension system has a feature which automatically low-
ers the vehicle to entry/exit ride height. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system
has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit
height and disable the automatic load leveling system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows you to
only display suspension warnings. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be
enabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine
running.
If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done through
the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Operation
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the
current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps
will show a position which the system is working to
achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
flashing on the “UP” button, the highest flashing indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the
⬙DOWN⬙ button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the
position the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the “UP” button once will move the suspension
one position higher from the current position, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. engine running, speed below
threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pushed multiple
times, each push will raise the requested level by one
position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest
position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
speed, etc).
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspen-
sion one position lower from the current level, assuming all
conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors closed, speed
below threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button can be pressed
multiple times. Each push will lower the requested level by
one position down to a minimum of Park Mode or the
lowest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e.
vehicle speed, etc.)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle
speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps
and instrument cluster display messages will operate the
same for automatic changes and user requested changes.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, and 6 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated
when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit Mode. If Entry/Exit
Mode is requested while vehicle speed is between 15
mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4
will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as
the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed. If
vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph
(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator
lamp 3 will flash until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at
which point indicator lamp 3 will go solid. If during the
height change to Entry/Exit Mode, the vehicle speed
exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), the height change will be
paused until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the height change continues to Entry/
Exit Mode, or exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle
height will return to NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be
selected while the vehicle is not moving provided that
the engine is still running and all doors remain closed.
• Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Customer driving will disable Transport Mode.
• Tire/Jack Mode - Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be
illuminated. Customer driving will disable Tire/Jack
Mode.
• Wheel Alignment Mode - Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be
illuminated. Customer driving will disable Wheel Align-
ment Mode.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle con-
trol systems, along with driver input, to provide the best
performance for all terrains.
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may use
second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to
minimize wheel slippage. If equipped with air suspen-
sion, the default ride height for Snow is Normal Ride
Height (NRH).
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive op-
eration can be used on and off road. Balances traction
with seamless steering feel to provide improved han-
dling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will change to
Normal Ride Height (NRH).
• Sand – Off road calibration for use on low traction
surfaces such as sand or wet grass. Driveline is maxi-
mized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less
forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set
to limit traction control management of throttle and
wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension, the default
ride height for Sand is Normal Ride Height (NRH).
• Mud – Off road calibration for use on low traction
surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maximized for trac-
tion. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving sur-
faces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit
traction control management of throttle and wheel spin.
If equipped with air suspension, the level will change to
Off Road 1.
Selec-Terrain Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
• Rock – Off road calibration only available in 4WD Low
range. The vehicle is raised (if equipped with Air
Suspension) for improved ground clearance. Traction
based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on high
traction off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles
such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air
suspension, the vehicle level will change to Off-Road 2.
If the Selec-Terrain switch is in ROCK mode, and the
transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High,
the Selec-Terrain system will return to AUTO.
NOTE: Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed
Control for steep downhill control. See “Electronic Brake
Control System” in this section for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Pro-
grammable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEER-
ING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the instrument cluster display, this indicates the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to
“Warning Lights And Messages” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER-
ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, they indicate that extreme steer-
ing maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over
temperature condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle
idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel con-
sumption. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter,
enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to
handle the additional engine starts.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if
all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the “Starting And
Operating” section for further information.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine
will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable
cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
• 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from previous
AUTOSTOP.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times
without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en-
gine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal appli-
cations).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
STOP/START Off Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in instru-
ment cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back
on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off 4 — SET (-)/Decel
2 — SET (+)/Accel 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — RES/Resume
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is on. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a message
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp,
along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre-
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre-
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition switch
OFF erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an ap-
propriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Al-
ways confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
(Continued)
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle
does not start moving within two seconds the ACC
system will display a message that the system will
release the brakes and that the brakes must be
applied manually. An audible chime will sound
when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
5 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — SET(+)/Accel 6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
3 — RES/Resume 7 — Distance Setting Decrease
4 — SET (-)/Decel 8 — CANC/Cancel
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following con-
ditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver’s door is open at low speeds.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will display the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelera-
tor pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last
set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake force
will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the
brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre-
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre-
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming
to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
Brake Alert
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a stand-
still, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC
SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
sor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc-
tion.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
sor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermar-
ket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded perfor-
mance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stabil-
ity reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turn Or Bend Example
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to main-
tain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is se-
lected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the system is turned on via the on/off
control. It turns green when the cruise control is set.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre-
ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre-
ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transmission, the vehicle brakes may be auto-
matically applied and released when performing a reverse
parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the auto-
matic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in
4LO.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this
section for limitations of this system and recommenda-
tions.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operat-
ing speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Display
The ParkSense display is always shown in the instrument
cluster display as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
Park Assist Ready
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
Slow Tone
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(inches/cm)
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150
cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120
cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100
cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second
Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect
System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Pro-
grammable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approxi-
mately five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instru-
ment cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “In-
strument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will display the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an autho-
rized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will display “PARKSENSE OFF” mes-
sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An open
liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your
vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, the
vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released
when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the sys-
tem detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the auto-
matic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle is in
4LO.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limita-
tions of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
mately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display warning will appear in
the instrument cluster display if the vehicle is in REVERSE
and the speed exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors (or six, if equipped with Active
Park Assist), located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the
area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on
the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to the
vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Park Assist Ready
Single 1/2 Second Tone
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone
Slow Tone For Rear Only
Fast Tone For Rear Only
Fast Tone
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument
cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a
continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning
alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Dis-
tance
(inches/cm)
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150
cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120
cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100
cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second
Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Vol-
ume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47
inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12
inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle
has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal
is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Uconnect System. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro-
grammable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approxi-
mately five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instru-
ment cluster display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will be
displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UN-
AVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is function-
ing properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain dis-
played for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see your
authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster dis-
play, see your authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking
maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, provid-
ing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steer-
ing wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. De-
pending on the driver’s parking maneuver selection, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneu-
vering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches
the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
and the driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi-
ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs
accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
The system will also continuously perform the dynamic
vehicle calibration to account for differences such as
over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be
enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns
on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns
off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering guid-
ance into the parking space.
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
• Driver’s door is opened.
• Rear liftgate is opened.
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu-
ally.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following condi-
tions are present:
• Gear position is in DRIVE.
• Ignition is in the RUN position.
• ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
• Driver’s door is closed.
• Rear liftgate is closed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven
above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear
fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to Switch to
Perpendicular” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if
you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a park-
ing space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Active ParkSense Searching
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel Space Found — Shift To Reverse
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu-
ally.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for com-
pleting the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — STOP
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the
maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is satis-
fied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position⬙
message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to Switch to
Perpendicular” message will show in the instrument clus-
ter display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel
parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to
Switch to Parallel” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a park-
ing space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
Active ParkSense Searching Display
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking
sequence.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel Space Found — Shift To Reverse
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu-
ally.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for com-
pleting the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — STOP
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in-
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Fail-
ure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist sys-
tem, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the
vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also,
the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane,
the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides visual
warnings through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off. The LED in Lane-
Sense button will be illuminated while the system is
deactivated.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
LaneSense On Message
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has
been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale )
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is on to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
torque warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
)
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale )
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
)
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, for-
ward collision warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia
radio display screen along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to ten seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK,
the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position, or the
user presses image defeat [X] to exit out of the camera
video display.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the
rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approxi-
mate distances for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in park, neutral or drive, the Rear View
Camera can be activated with the “Rear View Camera”
button
in the Controls menu. This feature allows the
customer to monitor the area directly behind the vehicle
(or trailer, if equipped) for up to ten seconds while at
speed. If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be dis-
played continuously until deactivated via the “X” but-
ton on the touchscreen.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE ENGINE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door
using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle
opens and holds the flapper doors while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper doors to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting
back in the spare tire storage area.
Fuel Filler Door Latch
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the fuel
door latch to the closed position.
Release Cable
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should
be manually returned to the closed position.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) or more,
it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to
ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine Model Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
3.6L (Std Cooling) 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L (Std Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L (HD Cooling) 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)
3.6L (HD Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)
5.7L (Std Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) 500 lbs (226 kg)
5.7L (HD Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (326 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information. The addition of
passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue
load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo
(to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1,678 kg).
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal (Summit
Models) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver
cover, this must be removed to access the trailer hitch
receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is located
at the bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
NOTE: Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the
locking retainer if needed for added leverage.
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you),
pull downwards to disengage the tabs located at the top
of the hitch receiver cover.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat the
procedure in reverse order.
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover
in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the
tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to
sway severely side to side which will cause loss of
control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Hitch Receiver Cover Weight Distribution
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled Servic-
ing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
inflation procedures.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac-
ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear (using the AutoStick shift
control) while operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, will improve performance and extend trans-
mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup. This action will also provide better engine brak-
ing.
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the high-
est gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
• Reduce speed.
• Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly
or could fail to deploy during a collision.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive
Models Without
4-LO Range
Four-Wheel Drive
Models With 4-LO
Range
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED See Instructions
• Transmission in
PARK
• Transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward
direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in
Transport Mode before tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra-
Lift” in “Starting and Operating” for more information.
If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for
example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be
fastened over the tires using specific straps (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause
fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper
tie-down tension.
Recreational Towing — Two Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is al-
lowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspen-
sion, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing,
to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) Four-Wheel Drive
Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not
have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/Quadra–
Drive II Four-Wheel Drive Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing.
The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selector switch
in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer
case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEU-
TRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,
with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspension,
ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located
by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light
behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
appear in the instrument cluster.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the transmission
back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL,
push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine turns off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK. Release
the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button twice (without
pressing the brake pedal), to turn the ignition to the
OFF mode.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or until
the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air suspen-
sion, the engine should be started and left running for a
minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
least once every 24 hours. This process allows the air
suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride height to compen-
sate for temperature effects.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located
by the selector switch) for one second.
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL
(N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift
to the position indicated by the selector switch.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the engine OFF.
9. Release the brake pedal.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
rower track to make them capable of performing in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Specific design character-
istics give them a higher center of gravity than conven-
tional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-
road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
Off-Road Driving Tips
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving with non-Summit models
that are also equipped with an Off Road Package, remove
the lower fascia to prevent damage. The lower fascia is
attached to the lower part of the front fascia with seven
quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand. The
front license plate bracket must be removed first if
equipped.
NOTE: On Summit models the lower front fascia is not
removable.
Lower Front Fascia Removal:
1. Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners.
2. Starting on one side of the vehicle, disengage lower
fascia from the upper fascia. Grasp the portion inside
the wheel well. Pulling it downwards and toward you,
separate the tabs from the slots in the upper fascia.
3. Continue working your way across the vehicle, separat-
ing the remaining tabs from the slots in the upper fascia.
NOTE: Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang from
the tabs in the opposite corner as damage to lower and
upper fascia may result.
4. Store the lower fascia in a safe location.
NOTE: It is recommend to also remove the radar sensor on
vehicle equipped to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). This
radar sensor is specifically calibrated to your vehicle and is
not interchangeable with other radar sensors.
Front Air Dam
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Radar Sensor Removal Procedure (If Equipped With
Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. With the lower fascia removed, which provides access to
the sensor and bracket, disconnect the wiring harness
from the sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool, disconnect the wire clip from the
bracket.
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the two fasteners that hold
the sensor bracket to the bumper beam.
NOTE: It is recommended to scribe location to assist in
reinstallation.
4. Locate the protective connector on the rear of the
bumper beam.
NOTE: Only models with the Off Road Package are
equipped with the a protective connector.
5. Remove the plug from the protective connector and
install on the sensor.
6. Insert the wiring harness connector into the protective
connector.
Bumper Beam
1 — Inside Bumper Beam
2 — Protective Connector Location
3 — Sensor Bracket Fasteners
4 — Sensor Bracket
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Store sensor and bracket in a safe place.
NOTE: All cruise control functions will be disabled when
the radar sensor is disconnected.
Radar Sensor Installation Procedure (If Equipped With
Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the pro-
tective connector on the bumper beam.
2. Remove plug from radar sensor and install in protective
connector.
3. Using the previously scribed marks, reinstall the radar
sensor and bracket using the two fasteners.
NOTE: Some alignment may be required upon fascia
installation to align sensor with fascia.
4. Install the wiring harness connector into the radar
sensor.
NOTE: If you receive a fault, see your authorized dealer
they may need to perform a sensor alignment.
Lower Front Fascia Installation
NOTE: This will only work if you have a helper.
1. Starting at the center of the vehicle, engage a sufficient
number of tabs to support the weight of the lower fascia
(typically one or two tabs) into the upper fascia.
2. Working your way outward, engage the tabs into the
slots on one side of the vehicle.
3. Return to the center of the vehicle and repeat Step 2 to
the opposite side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
• It may be necessary to apply additional force to
individual tabs to make sure they are fully engaged.
• Do not use any tools to apply additional force to the
tabs as damage to the upper and lower fascias may
result.
4. Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners.
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the lowest
useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle or
terrain be selected. The vehicle height should then be
raised as required by the changes in terrain.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change the
vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec-Terrain
switch position. The vehicle height can be changed from
the default height for each Selec-Terrain mode by normal
use of the air suspension switches. Refer to “Four Wheel
Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations
such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional low
speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW
range.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range locks
front and rear drivelines together and does not allow
for differential action between the front to rear drive-
shafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will cause
driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
there are a number of precautions that must be considered
before entering the water.
NOTE: Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20
inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing small rivers or
streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehi-
cle’s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to
switch the system into recirculation mode during water
fording.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through
water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
with
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than
5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off),
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid
depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water can
erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream
of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave
effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of water is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contami-
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent
component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a lower
gear than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-
revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be
lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and
shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill, allowing
the compression braking of the engine to help regulate
your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill
in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill. Always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill,
ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by
turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh
“bite” into the surface and will usually provide traction to
complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill Descent or
Selec-Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent or Selec-Speed Control
use the following procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer case
into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the
hill with all four wheels turning against engine compres-
sion drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed
and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can
cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............392
䡵 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .392
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................398
▫ Replacement Bulbs .....................398
▫ Bulb Replacement ......................400
䡵 FUSES ................................405
▫ General Information .....................406
▫ Underhood Fuses ......................407
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........413
▫ Jack Location .........................414
▫ Spare Tire Stowage .....................414
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................414
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................415
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................421
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................421
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............422
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................423
䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ..............424
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............425
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................426
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............428
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............430
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models .................431
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models .................432
▫ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .......432
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................433
䡵 EVENT
DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............433
7
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch
bank just above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
Assist And SOS Mirror
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you will be connected
to a representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS op-
erator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional assistance is needed.
Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be
able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and
hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s
SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamps (Low Beam) — If Equipped H11
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam) D3S (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Headlamps (High Beam) — If Equipped H9
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker — If Equipped W5W
Premium Front Side Marker — If Equipped LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp — If Equipped 7444NA (WY28/8W)
Rear Body Side Backup Lamp 7440 (W21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Body Side Stop/Turn Lamps 3157KRD LCP (P27/7W)
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
CHMSL - Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED - (Service At Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can
be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer
or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399
Bulb Replacement
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this,
you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned
on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
system charges.
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back to
vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
NOTE:
• The air filter housing must be removed.
• The windshield washer reservoir may need to be
rotated out of the way by removing the fastener.
• Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to be reposi-
tioned by removing the fasteners, and moving the unit
out of the way.
3. To access the low beam bulb you must remove the
rubber boot seal from backside of the lamp housing.
400 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: Ensure the rubber boot is properly reinstalled to
prevent water and moisture from entering the lamp.
CAUTION!
• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the
lamp wiring.
4. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
NOTE:
• The air filter housing must be removed.
• The windshield washer reservoir may need to be
rotated out of the way by removing the fastener.
• Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to be reposi-
tioned by removing the fasteners, and moving the unit
out of the way.
3. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove from housing.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
Rubber Boot Seal
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disen-
gage the lamp from the aperture panel.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
402 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
Rear Of Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Turn/Stop Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Backup Bulb Socket
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 403
2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim from the
liftgate.
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s).
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Liftgate Lower Trim
Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
404 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp is an LED. Service at
an authorized dealer.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See your authorized
dealer for service.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 405
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive cur-
rent.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown
fuse).
406 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A
description of each fuse and component may be stamped
on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each
fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the
following chart.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan — If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension — If
Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Pump
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/
Brake Vacuum Pump
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2
Power Distribution Center
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 407
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3/Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor Front
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
F15 40 Amp Green – LTR (Low Temperature Radiator) Engine
Cooling Pump — If Equipped
F17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lights #1
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F26 30 Amp Pink – Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module,
ECU and Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow (Receptacle) / Trailer Tow (Sepa-
rate E-Brake) / Trailer Tow (BUX) — If
Equipped
408 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F32 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp Pink – Slip Differential Control — If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F37 25 Amp Clear – Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate — If Equipped
F40 – 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Level-
ing
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security Gateway
F49 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module/Slip Differ-
ential - If Equipped
F51 – 15 Amp Blue KIN/RF HUB/Steering Column Lock — If
Equipped
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If
Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel Engine Only)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 409
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor — If Equipped
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
F59 – 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel Engine Only)
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
F61 – 10 Amp Red Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel Engine Only)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / Ignition Coil Capacitors /
Short Runner Valve Actuator — If Equipped
(Gas) Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof/Rain Sensor/Inside Rear View Mir-
ror / USB Port / DSCR / DTV — If
Equipped
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/UCI Port/USB Charging Port
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier/ANCM — If Equipped
F72 – 10 Amp Red ECM
410 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
F76 – 10 Amp Red Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Dis-
connect Module — If Equipped
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power
Steering
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener/Anti-
Intrusion Module — If Equipped/Siren — If
Equipped
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights — If
Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module/Cruise
Control/DTV — If Equipped
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension — If Equipped
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster/SGW/ITBM — If
Equipped
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 411
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Selectable
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Blind Spot Sensor — If
Equipped
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger
— If Equipped
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel
— If Equipped
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Ventilated Seats/Front Heated Seats — If
Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems
Module/HALF/Park Assist
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping — If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear
HVAC — If Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center
Console/Rear Cargo — If Equipped)
412 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 413
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located in
the rear cargo area, below the load floor.
NOTE: The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located
on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an
auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler
neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For vehicles not
equipped with a spare tire, the fuel filler funnel is stored in
the left storage bin under the load floor. For more informa-
tion on the Cap-Less Fuel System, refer to “Refueling The
Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating”.
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear
cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
nut.
Preparations For Jacking
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct jacking
points. Failure to follow this information could cause
damage to the vehicle or underbody components.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
Jack Storage Location
414 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, refer to
“Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information on disabling automatic
leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 415
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still
on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack Warning Label
Jack And Tool Assembly
416 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange just
behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift
point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Jacking Locations
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 417
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as indi-
cated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill mold-
ing. Be sure the jack is placed in the proper engage-
ment location on the inside of the panel. Damage of the
vehicle may occur if the procedure is not properly
followed.
Front Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
418 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
Mounting Spare Tire
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 419
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut
torque, refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an autho-
rized dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return it
and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray.
12. Remove the small center cap and securely store the
road wheel in the cargo area.
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with the
special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall
the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the rear load
floor cover.
NOTE: Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more
than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Stowed Spare
420 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 421
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s
front seat. There are remote terminals located under the
hood to assist in jump starting.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not
touch each other, or either vehicle, until properly con-
nected for jump starting.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-
sion into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
Jump Starting Locations
(+) — Remote Positive Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
(-) — Remote Negative Post
422 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 423
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 rpm
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and
can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested at
an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located in the
spare tire storage area. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an
auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler
neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to
“Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating”.
424 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 425
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park Re-
lease. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s
seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the
Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by
proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
Manual Park Release Cover
426 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal latch
in towards the tether strap.
5. While the metal latch is in the open position, pull
upward on the tether strap until the lever clicks and
latches in the released position. The transmission is now
out of PARK and the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
Release Latch
Released Position
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 427
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally,
firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release, apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has
been unlocked, be sure it is stowed properly and locks
into position.
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in
place.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE
while gently pressing the accelerator.
Release Latch
Stowed Position
428 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 429
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmis-
sion and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
the “Starting And Operating” section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be
placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from
the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to the section
on Quadra-Lift for more information. If the vehicle cannot
be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not
run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using
specific tire tie-down nets. Failure to follow these instruc-
tions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of
proper tie-down tension.
Towing Con-
dition
Wheels OFF
The Ground
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel
Drive Models
Without 4WD
LOW Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4WD LOW Range
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
NOT AL-
LOWED
See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL
(N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Front NOT AL-
LOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT AL-
LOWED
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
430 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on
the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine
is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or
with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 431
CAUTION!
• Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case
is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case may
be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the
transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed with
all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal dam-
age to the transmission or transfer case will occur if
a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle.
The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle.
432 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 433
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................437
▫ Scheduled Servicing — Gasoline Engine ......437
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................442
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................442
▫ 5.7L Engine ..........................443
▫ Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine .......444
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................444
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................445
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................445
▫ Engine Oil ...........................446
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................448
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................448
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............450
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ............454
▫ Body Lubrication ......................455
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................456
▫ Exhaust System ........................460
▫ Cooling System ........................462
▫ Brake System .........................467
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................468
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...................469
▫ Transfer Case .........................470
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................470
䡵 TIRES ................................471
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................471
▫ Tires — General Information ..............477
▫ T
ire Types ............................483
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................485
8
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............487
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............488
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations ............489
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................490
▫ Treadwear ............................490
▫ Traction Grades ........................491
▫ Temperature Grades .....................491
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE ..................491
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................492
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........492
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........492
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................493
䡵 INTERIORS ............................494
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................494
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................494
▫ Leather Parts ..........................495
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................495
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Scheduled Servicing — Gasoline Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe operating conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and
off-road environment, or is operated predominantly at idle
or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the following pages for
required maintenance.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your vehicle
for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
XXX X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.** X
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
Change transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Oil Filter Access
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
Checking Oil Level — Gasoline Engine
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom
of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the
safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The instrument cluster display will indicate when the
washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low
fluid level, the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic
outline and the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be
displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the
washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it
to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this
will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your
windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solu-
tion or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Gasoline Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compart-
ment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE
5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper opera-
tion of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel Saver
Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement —
Gasoline Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you
find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change
your air cleaner filter.
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface
facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
(Continued)
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other service facili-
ties using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides
of the glove compartment door, partially close the glove
compartment door and push inward to release the glove
compartment travel stop on one side and repeat this
procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment door
toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the glove
compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart-
ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment
door.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining tab
and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to the
HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by pulling
the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on the right
side to fully remove the cover.
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door hinge
and reattach the tension tether by inserting the tether
clip in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away
from the face of the glove compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage the
glove compartment travel stops.
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the follow-
ing points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding
the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1—Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3—WiperArm
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3—WiperArm
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper
blade from the wiper arm).
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade
side of the wiper facing up and away from the wind-
shield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the
wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it
into its locked position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1—WiperBlade
2—WiperArm
3 — Release Tab
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm
with your right hand. With your left hand hold the
wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper
blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2—WiperArm
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2—WiperArm
3 — Wiper Blade
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the
end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper
arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush
with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1—WiperBlade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3—WiperArm
4 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumula-
tion of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level within the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the
top of the master cylinder area before removing cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads
are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the
system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an im-
proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22
to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 inch
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22
to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be
inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
474 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
476 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 477
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
478 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 479
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experi-
enced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with
another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure
sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is
changed after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be
reused when driven under run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa))
condition.
NOTE: TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
480 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further
information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 481
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
482 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 483
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
484 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting
And Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare
tire designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 485
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
486 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to
the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 487
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, Thule XG-12 Pro or equivalent
is recommended on P245/70R17, 265/60R18 or 265/
50R20 tires.
488 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 489
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Tire Rotation
490 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 491
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
492 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 493
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
494 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 495
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA...................498
▫ Vehicle Identification Number .............498
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................499
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .499
▫ Torque Specifications ....................499
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS....................501
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................501
▫ 5.7L Engine ..........................501
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................502
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................502
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............502
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .503
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......503
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................503
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................504
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............504
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................505
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................506
▫ Engine ..............................506
▫ Chassis .............................508
9
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel
pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the wind-
shield. This number also is stamped on the right front floor,
behind the right front seat. Move the right front seat
forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information Dis-
closure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save
this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identifi-
cation number and optional equipment.
Windshield VIN Label Location
498 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Right Front Body VIN Location
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 499
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half
way).
NOTE: If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
500 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide opti-
mum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted oc-
tane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see an dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded gaso-
line having an octane range of 87 to 89 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is rec-
ommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 501
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
(Continued)
502 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION! (Continued)
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illu-
minate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 503
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
504 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
5.7L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
16 Quarts 15.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 505
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equiva-
lent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
506 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 507
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid
3353.
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II) We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubri-
cant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip
Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubri-
cant SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier.
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic Limited-Slip
Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubri-
cant SAE 75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE
J1703 should be used.
508 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................511
䡵 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR ................511
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................512
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................513
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4
Settings ..............................514
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings ....................536
䡵 OFF ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ..........557
▫ Off Road Pages Status Bar.................558
▫ Vehicle Dynamics.......................559
▫ Suspension ...........................560
▫ Pitch And Roll .........................561
▫ Accessory Gauges ......................562
▫ Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ...............563
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ............................564
▫ Radio Operation........................564
▫ Media Mode ..........................564
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .565
䡵 UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............565
▫ Getting Started ........................565
▫ Dual Video Screen ......................567
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player......................567
▫ Play Video Games ......................570
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
Radio ...............................570
10
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System ..............................572
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped ............................573
▫ Headphones Operation ...................574
▫ Controls .............................574
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries ..........575
▫ Accessibility — If Equipped ...............575
▫ Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty. . .576
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .581
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........581
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ...........................582
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................582
▫ Get Started ...........................583
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................584
▫ Radio ...............................584
▫ Media ...............................585
▫ Phone ...............................586
▫ Voice Text Reply — If Equipped ............587
▫ Climate ..............................589
▫ Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped .........590
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If
Equipped ............................591
▫ Register (4C/4C NAV) ...................591
▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) .....592
▫ Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ................592
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV).............593
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ..............594
▫ Do Not Disturb ........................595
▫ Andr
oid Auto — If Equipped ..............595
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ..............597
▫ General Information .....................599
▫ Additional Information ...................599
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............599
510 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
Uconnect 4 Apps Menu
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Apps Menu
10
MULTIMEDIA 511
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
512 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (U.S. Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents)
to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Pri-
vacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many fea-
tures can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 4 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
10
MULTIMEDIA 513
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4
Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM
Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, and Sys-
tem Information.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu
or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the “Up” or “Down” Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons
On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
514 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With
Headlights On
-+
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness With Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
Headlights Off
-+
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness With Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
AutoShow Smartphone
Display Upon Connection
On Off
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 515
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption”
[MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of
measure independently.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never With Help Always
516 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
Set Date — If Equipped Up Arrow Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.
10
MULTIMEDIA 517
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen displays the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay cancels if the
vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the
OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
518 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision
Warning — If Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will re-
main off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only” option is
selected a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure
is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of poten-
tial forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision
Warning Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Far Med Near
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front
of you needs to be at, before the system warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you,
based on the option is selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you the
least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
10
MULTIMEDIA 519
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or vi-
sual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound & Display.”
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system detects objects located behind
the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
LaneSense Warning— If
Equipped
Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
520 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Strength
(LDW) — If Equipped
Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and shows a visual
alert in the outside mirrors, or it shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the
turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned results in the BSM not operating to specification.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
— If Equipped
On Off
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse On Off
Paddle Shifters Enable Disable
10
MULTIMEDIA 521
Setting Name Selectable Options
Steering Feel Options Sport Normal Comfort
NOTE:
The “Steering Feel Options” setting allows you to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the “Comfort” button on
the touchscreen to provide a balance of steering feel and steering effort. Press the “Normal” button on the touch-
screen to provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to
provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
522 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Illumination On
Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors
are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto High Beam — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto High Beams” is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under cer-
tain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 523
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is
in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote
Start — If Equipped
On Off
524 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Remote Door Unlock Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door unlocks on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you must
push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors un-
locks on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors unlock no matter which Pas-
sive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door unlocks when the
driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once only results in the driver’s door opening once. If the
driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry On Off
Memory Linked To FOB
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Memory Linked To FOB” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s
seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering
and exiting the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Alert — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Power Liftgate Alert” feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
10
MULTIMEDIA 525
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated
Seat & Steering Wheel —
If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn
ON.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power
Delay — If
Equipped
0 sec 45 sec 5 min 10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system
(if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to ten minutes after the igni-
tion is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
526 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut OFF.
Easy Exit Seat — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Auto Entry/Exit — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Entry/Exit” feature automatically lowers the vehicle ride height position when shifted into PARK, when it
is selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 527
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the compass variance zone should be set for best results.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass
Variance
123456789101112131415
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
528 MULTIMEDIA
Compass Calibration Start
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or me-
tallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
Compass Variance Zone Map
10
MULTIMEDIA 529
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Up Arrow
Button
Down Ar-
row Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right Ar-
row Button
Center “C”
Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
530 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
When selecting the “Auto Play” sub setting, a message will pop up stating “USB devices will automatically play me-
dia when AutoPlay is turned On.”
Loudness — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped -3 +3
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
10
MULTIMEDIA 531
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/
Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Display Phone Info In Cluster — If
Equipped
Off On
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” setting is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height posi-
tion when the vehicle is shifted to PARK for easy entry/exit.
Display Suspension Messages All Warnings Only
NOTE:
The “Display Suspension Messages” setting allows you to choose whether you want the Suspension system to display
all suspension messages, or to only display suspension warnings.
532 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” setting is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the
suspension while the vehicle is on a jack, changing a tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” setting is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” setting prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel align-
ment service.
10
MULTIMEDIA 533
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start Off On
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
534 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
10
MULTIMEDIA 535
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
System Information System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “System Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety &
Driving Assistance, Mirrors & Wipers, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Suspen-
sion, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Acces-
sibility, Reset, and System Information.
NOTE: Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the “Back” Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
“Up” or “Down” Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
536 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Espanol Francais
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Espa-
ñol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness With Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
10
MULTIMEDIA 537
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness With Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark ap-
pears showing that the setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
538 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In
Cluster
On Off
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption”
[MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of
measure independently.
10
MULTIMEDIA 539
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS On Off
Set Time Hours +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If
Equipped
On Off
540 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup
Camera Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
10
MULTIMEDIA 541
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision
Warning — If Equipped
Off Only Warning Warning & Active Braking
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it remains
off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Only Warning” option
is selected a chime sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure
is needed. When the “Warning & Active Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case
of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision
Warning Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle
directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in
front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives
you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
542 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early Med Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If
Equipped
Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound & Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or vi-
sual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound,” or “Sound & Display.”
Front ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system detects objects located behind
the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
10
MULTIMEDIA 543
Setting Name Selectable Options
Electric Power Steering
Default
Normal Sport Comfort
NOTE:
When the “Electric Power Steering Default” is selected, it allows you to change the default setting of your vehicle to
either normal, sport, or comfort.
Paddle Shifters Enable Disable
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is activated and shows a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is deactivated. If your
vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the
sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor
that is misaligned results in the BSM not operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
544 MULTIMEDIA
Mirror and Wipers
After pressing the “Mirror and Wipers” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse On Off
Auto Folding Side Mirrors — If
Equipped
On Off
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illuminated On Approach 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
10
MULTIMEDIA 545
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automati-
cally under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
546 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEU-
TRAL position, and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote
Start
On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks
Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door unlocks with the first push
of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When
⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock but-
ton. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors unlock no matter which Pas-
sive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the
driver’s door unlocks when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver
Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once results in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver
Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all
doors (or use key fob).
10
MULTIMEDIA 547
Setting Name Selectable Options
Passive Entry — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
Personal Settings Linked
to Key Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steer-
ing column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Lift Gate Alert — If
Equipped
On Off
548 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat On Off
Engine Off Power Delay 0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension — If
Equipped
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 549
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” setting is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height posi-
tion when the vehicle is shifted to PARK for easy entry/exit.
Display Suspension Messages All Warning
NOTE:
The “Display Suspension Messages” setting allows you to choose whether you want the Suspension system to display
all suspension messages, or to only display suspension warnings.
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” setting is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the
suspension while the vehicle is on a jack, changing a tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” setting is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
550 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” setting prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel align-
ment service.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted
Volume
Off 1 2 3
10
MULTIMEDIA 551
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
+-
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlay On Off
NOTE:
The “AutoPlay” setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connected device as soon as it is
connected.
552 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed
In Cluster
On Off
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
NOTE:
The “Do Not Disturb” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text, or both, to any incoming
call, or text, before sending it directly to voicemail. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the
road.
Paired Phones and Audio Sources List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and
Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Display Phone Info In Cluster On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 553
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
SXM Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected dur-
ing that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will
miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
554 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the “Accessibility” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Video Button Readback On Off
NOTE:
The “Video Button Readback” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using
DVD/Blu-ray functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the “Play” button is selected, the sys-
tem will announce “Play Button Selected”, and then once pressed again the “Play” button will perform its action.
10
MULTIMEDIA 555
Reset
After pressing the “Reset” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Software License” screen will appear, displaying the system software license and ver-
sion.
556 MULTIMEDIA
OFF ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with Off Road Pages, which
provides the vehicle status while operating on off road
conditions. It supplies information relating to the vehicle
ride height, the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll
of the vehicle (if equipped), and the active Selec-Terrain
mode.
To access Off Road Pages, press the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen, and then select “Off Road Pages”.
Off Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
• Vehicle Dynamics
• Suspension
• Pitch and Roll — If Equipped
Main Menu
1 — Off Road Pages App
2 — Uconnect Apps Button
10
MULTIMEDIA 557
• Accessory Gauge
• Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
Off Road Pages Status Bar
The Off Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom
of Off Road Pages and is present in each of the five
selectable page options. It provides continually updating
information for the following items:
• Current Transfer Case Status (only appears when in
4WD LOW)
• Current Selec-Terrain mode — If Equipped
• Current Latitude/Longitude
• Current Altitude of the vehicle
• Status of Hill Descent
• Selec-Speed Control and Selected Speed in MPH (km/h)
Status Bar
1 — Transfer Case Status (Only When In 4WD LOW)
2 — Selec-Terrain Mode — If Equipped
3 — Current Latitude/Longitude
4 — Current Altitude
5 — Hill Descent
6 — Selec-Speed Status And Set Speed
558 MULTIMEDIA
Vehicle Dynamics
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information concern-
ing the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
• Steering angle in degrees
• Status of Transfer case
• Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
10
MULTIMEDIA 559
Suspension
The Suspension page displays information concerning the
vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
• Suspension Articulation Indicator
• Current Ride Height Status — If Equipped
• Normal
• Off Road 1
• Off Road 2
• Entry/Exit
• Aero
NOTE: The wheel articulation will be represented by a
yellow color in the Suspension Articulation Indicator. If
Ride Height is adjusted, the Ride Height indicator on the
screen will switch to the appropriate height and the
Suspension Articulation Indicator will show the movement
and change in height.
Suspension Menu
1 — Suspension Articulation Indicator
2 — Current Ride Height
560 MULTIMEDIA
Pitch And Roll
The Pitch And Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in
degrees. The pitch and roll gauges provide a visualization
of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch And Roll Menu
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
10
MULTIMEDIA 561
Accessory Gauges
The Accessory Gauges page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil
Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature,
and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature
562 MULTIMEDIA
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current Selec-Terrain
mode through a high resolution image. Adjusting the
Selec-Terrain mode will alter the image on the screen. The
vehicle must be in the ON/RUN position to display
Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
• Snow
• Sand
• Auto — Default
• Mud
• Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4 Wheel Drive Low
NOTE: While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off Road
Pages Status Bar will also display the current Selec-Terrain
mode.
Current Selec-Terrain Mode
10
MULTIMEDIA 563
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button makes the radio switch between
the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
564 MULTIMEDIA
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your favorite
CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of stan-
dard video games or audio devices.
Please review this Owner’s Manual to become familiar
with its features and operation.
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
LCD screen cover by lifting up on the cover.
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray disc
player. If equipped with a Blu-ray disc player, the icon
will be present on the player.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by pushing
the power button on the remote control.
RSE System Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 565
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-ray
disc is inserted into the disc player, the screen(s) turn(s)
on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on
and playback begins.
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the remote control and headphones, refers to Screen
1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Remote
Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (passenger
side).
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
566 MULTIMEDIA
• The system can be controlled either by the front seat
occupants utilizing the touchscreen radio or by the rear
seat occupants using the remote control.
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray disc player is located in the center console.
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
10
MULTIMEDIA 567
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc player with the
label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen, the lan-
guage screen, or starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Rear 2.
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press the “Media”
button on the touchscreen, and then press the “Disc”
button. Press the “Play” button, and then the “full
screen” button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. The vehicle must be
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
Using The Touchscreen Radio
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1. This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is
not highlighted, select button to access controls for Screen
1/Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
Rear Media Control Screen
568 MULTIMEDIA
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle. Press-
ing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable remote control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2. This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is
not highlighted, select button to access controls for Screen
2/Channel 2 source.
6. Cabin Audio Mode
Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
entertainment source currently shown on the rear media
control screen.
7. Radio Full Screen Mode
Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
8. RSE Mode
Select this button to change source for the active (high-
lighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control
screen.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then
press the rear media button on the touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin playing
the Blu-ray disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen), and
then press the source key, and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
and options.
10
MULTIMEDIA 569
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input.
2. Right audio in (red).
3. Left audio in (white).
4. Video in (yellow).
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles may exceed
the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
Radio
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray Disc with the label facing as
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray Disc player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s side
rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and Head-
phone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s
side rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
570 MULTIMEDIA
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push
ENTER/OK.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect system touch-
screen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media
Control screen.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen Rear Media Control Screen
10
MULTIMEDIA 571
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, and the
select source button on the touchscreen. Press the DISC
button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA column. To
exit, press the X at the top right of the screen.
NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Blu-ray Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote control
functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will
turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray Discs.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source will
display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
• Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source will
display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even when
the screen(s) are closed.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
572 MULTIMEDIA
Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If Equipped
Controls And Indicators
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is pushed,
the currently affected channel or channel button is
illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control. When
the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left
screen). When the selector switch is in the Rear 2
position, the remote controls the functionality of head-
phone Channel 2 (right screen).
5. 䉴 — Push to navigate menus.
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.
7. 䉴䉴 — Push and hold to fast forward through the
current audio track or video chapter.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray Disc
features.
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and shuffle
options, the Blu-ray Disc popup menu, the DVD title
menu, or to access disc menus.
11. Keypad — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
12.
(Stop) — Stops disc play.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
10
MULTIMEDIA 573
13. 䉳䉳 — Push and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter.
14.
— Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to source
selection screen.
16. 䉲 — Push to navigate menus.
17. 䉳 — Push to navigate menus.
18. OK— Push to select the highlighted option in a menu.
19. 䉱 — Push to navigate menus.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not muted
and the headphone channel selector switch is on the
desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
574 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system is
turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector
switch.
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the Re-
mote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are
tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the Re-
mote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are
tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use
the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to
the available modes and push the OK button to select
the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover down-
ward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them ac-
cording to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Accessibility — If Equipped
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray system that
announces a function prior to performing the action. For
further information refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia.”
10
MULTIMEDIA 575
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the
initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this particular
Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The
warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as
long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use
is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does
not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse,
abuse or modification of the Product other than by Aptiv.
Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal
use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is
available for a nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE
FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY
FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS AP-
TIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEM-
PLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and
jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limita-
tion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific
legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary
from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will repair or
replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the right to
replace any discontinued Product with a comparable
model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY
FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MER-
CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Aptiv wireless headphones, or to register your wireless
headphones, please phone:
1-248-724-5900
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list
of all commands which control playback of the disc.
576 MULTIMEDIA
Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray Disc or DVD Video
with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the
remote control’s SETUP button activates the Display Set-
tings menu. These settings control the appearance of the
video on the screen. The factory default settings are already
set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change
these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s naviga-
tion buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the remote
control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the value for
the currently selected item. To reset all values back to the
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray Disc player’s
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the Mode/
Source Select menu.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the
Video Screen Display Settings
10
MULTIMEDIA 577
remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If audio is
still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing the following
types of 4.7 inches (12 cm) diameter discs:
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions3–6)
profile 3.0
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray Disc player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in order
for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does
not match the region code for the player, the disc will not
play.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray Disc
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program material
is automatically mixed down to two channels, which may
result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase
the volume level to account for this change in level,
remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or
to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-
ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also
play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW
disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not
supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines
when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed
are playable.
578 MULTIMEDIA
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-
9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other
formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not supported.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the
Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable
in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc recording
software publisher for more information about burning
playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
CD-RW).
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA files
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙.WMA⬙.
To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these exten-
sions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as artist
name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play. The
Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and begin
playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg
Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray player
will automatically skip the file and begin playing the
next available file.
10
MULTIMEDIA 579
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended sample
rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
Blu-ray Disc player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next
file, or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current
or previous file.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc
Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio
displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are
all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray Disc
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skip-
ping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the end of
the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will return to
the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of
the first track.
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during extremely
hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tem-
perature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this occurs, the
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the rear
seat displays until a safe temperature is reached. This
shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-ray
Disc player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technol-
ogy must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended
for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise autho-
rized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured un-
der license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP Loss-
less⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
580 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
MULTIMEDIA 581
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 4, or Uconnect
4C/4C NAV system.
Uconnect 4
582 MULTIMEDIA
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps
menus, of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C
with 8.4-inch display system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
• Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
• Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
• Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
10
MULTIMEDIA 583
• You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Voice Commands
3 — Push To End Call
584 MULTIMEDIA
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“ Help.” The system provides you with a list of com-
mands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
10
MULTIMEDIA 585
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
Uconnect 4 Media
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
586 MULTIMEDIA
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “ Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “ Call
John Smith work.”
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the VR
button
or Phone button (if enabled) and say “
Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
VR button
or Phone button (if enabled). After
the beep, say: “ Reply.”
Uconnect 4 Phone
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
10
MULTIMEDIA 587
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later. I need direc-
tions.
See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
NOTE: Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the
system does not transpose the message.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
588 MULTIMEDIA
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “ Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 4 Climate
10
MULTIMEDIA 589
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say: “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
590 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) net-
work connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
touchscreen to get started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
10
MULTIMEDIA 591
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate ser-
vices in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
• U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs
if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle
will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects
issues with its key systems that need your attention. For
further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and sending a destination from your phone to your
vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
1. Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian
services, download the Uconnect App to your mobile
device. Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app.
2. Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
Mobile App
592 MULTIMEDIA
3. Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.
4. Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner
of the app to bring up app settings.
NOTE: For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not
available for Uconnect 4 system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Show fuel prices”
• “ Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “ Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
10
MULTIMEDIA 593
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and re-
sponds back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
594 MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free
Available
10
MULTIMEDIA 595
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
596 MULTIMEDIA
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running Android
5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play.
Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks
of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 597
• Maps — if equipped
• Additional Apps — if equipped
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of
Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
598 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian or call:
1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or
call: 1-877-324-9091
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
• Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
• If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
• Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
10
MULTIMEDIA 599
• Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
• Store the disc in its case after playing.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
• Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
600 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................602
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............602
▫ Prepare A List .........................602
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............602
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................602
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............603
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........603
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................603
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........603
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................603
▫ Service Contract .......................604
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............605
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................605
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............605
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .605
▫ In Canada ............................605
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............606
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
602 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufac-
turer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or
speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-
CHRY.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 603
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
604 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 605
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
606 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
About Your Brakes .........................499
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .293
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............464
Adding Fuel ..............................359
Additives, Fuel ............................502
Adjust
Forward ................................49
Rearward ...............................49
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ........................216
Air Bag Warning Light .....................212
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................217
Enhanced Accident Response .............222, 433
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................433
FrontAirBag ...........................214
If Deployment Occurs .....................221
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................216
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............224
Maintenance ............................224
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............213
Side Air Bags ...........................217
Transporting Pets ........................244
Air Bag Light.......................149, 212, 246
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......448
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................450
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................450, 451
Air Conditioner System ......................450
Air Conditioning............................92
Air Conditioning Filter .................95, 448, 451
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................94
Air Filter ................................448
Air Pressure
Tires..................................478
Alarm
Arm The System .......................34, 35
Disarm The System ........................34
Rearm The System ........................35
Security Alarm........................33, 153
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .................................6
Ambient Light .............................78
Andr
oid Auto .............................595
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................463, 505
Disposal ...............................465
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................166
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................153
Apple CarPlay ............................597
Assist, Hill Start ...........................168
Audio Systems (Radio).......................511
Auto Down Power Windows ...................97
608 INDEX
Automatic Dimming Mirror ....................66
Automatic Door Locks .....................41, 42
Automatic Headlights ........................74
Automatic High Beams .......................73
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............93
Automatic Transmission ..................253, 264
Adding Fluid ...........................469
Fluid And Filter Change ...................469
Fluid Change ...........................469
Fluid Level Check .....................468, 469
Fluid Type ..........................468, 508
Gear Ranges ............................266
Special Additives .........................468
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ........270
Auto Up Power Windows .....................97
Auxiliary Driving Systems ....................181
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .........125
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................125
Axle Fluid ...............................508
Battery...............................150, 445
Charging System Light ....................150
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................22
Battery Saver Feature.........................76
Belts, Seat ................................246
Blind Spot Monitoring .......................181
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................455
B-Pillar Location ...........................476
Brake Assist System .........................168
Brake Control System, Electronic................167
Brake Fluid ...........................467, 508
Brake System ..........................467, 499
Anti-Lock (ABS) .........................499
Fluid Check ............................467
Master Cylinder .........................467
Parking ...............................260
Warning Light ...........................149
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................263
Br
eak-In Recommendations, New Vehicle..........259
Bulb Replacement ..........................398
Bulbs, Light ..............................248
Camera, Rear .............................357
Capacities, Fluid ...........................505
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..................................424
Oil (Engine) .........................442, 447
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................465
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................245, 504
Cargo Area Cover .......................111,112
12
INDEX 609
Cargo Compartment.........................111
Cargo Tie-Downs...........................113
Car Washes...............................493
Cellular Phone ............................581
Certification Label ..........................362
Chains, Tire ..............................488
Changing A Flat Tire .....................413, 470
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................472
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .163
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............245
Checks, Safety.............................245
Child Restraint ............................225
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................229
Child Seat Installation .....................241
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........238
Infant And Child Restraints .................227
LATCH Positions .........................231
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......231
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........228
Seating Positions .........................230
Clean Air Gasoline .........................502
Cleaning
Wheels ................................487
Climate Control ............................85
Automatic ..............................86
Cold Weather Operation......................258
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................599
Compact Spare Tire .........................485
Console
Storage ................................122
Console, Overhead .........................124
Contract, Service ...........................604
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............465
Cooling System ............................462
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................464
Coolant Level ...........................465
Cooling Capacity .........................505
Disposal
Of Used Coolant ..................465
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................463
Inspection ..........................462, 465
Points To Remember ......................466
Pressure Cap ............................465
Radiator Cap ...........................465
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......463, 505, 506
Corrosion Protection ........................492
Cruise Control (Speed Control)..............290, 293
Cruise Light ...........................159, 161
Cupholders...............................124
Customer Assistance ........................602
610 INDEX
Cybersecurity .............................512
Daytime Running Lights ......................72
Dealer Service .............................445
Defroster, Windshield........................246
Diagnostic System, Onboard...................161
Dimmer Control Switch .......................79
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................444
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................430
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................465
Do Not Disturb ............................595
Door Ajar.............................150, 152
Door Ajar Light ........................150, 152
Door Locks
Automatic ............................41, 42
Drag And Drop Menu .......................511
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................43
Driving..................................382
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System).........565
Economy (Fuel) Mode .......................264
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........125
Electric Brake Control System ..................167
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................166
Electronic Roll Mitigation ...............171, 174
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................68
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........291
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............171
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........151
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .................428
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................392
Jacking ............................413, 470
Jump Starting ...........................421
Tow Hooks .............................432
Emission Control System Maintenance............163
Engine ..................................442
Air Cleaner .............................448
Block Heater ............................258
Br
eak-In Recommendations .................259
Checking Oil Level .......................444
Compartment ........................442, 443
Compartment Identification ..............442, 443
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................506
Cooling ...............................462
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................245, 504
Fails To Start ............................257
Flooded, Starting .........................257
12
INDEX 611
Fuel Requirements ........................501
Jump Starting ...........................421
Oil ............................446, 505, 506
Oil Filler Cap ........................442, 447
Oil Filter ...............................448
Oil Reset ..............................138
Oil Selection .........................446, 505
Oil Synthetic ............................447
Overheating ............................425
Starting ............................253, 254
Engine Oil Viscosity .....................446, 447
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart .................446, 447
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........222, 433
Ethanol..................................502
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................245, 504
Exhaust System ........................245, 460
Exterior Lights ..........................71, 248
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................448
Air Conditioning ...................95, 448, 451
Engine Oil ..........................448, 506
Engine Oil Disposal .......................448
Flashers .................................392
Hazard Warning .........................392
Turn Signals .....................160, 248, 401
Flash-To-Pass ..............................73
Flooded Engine Starting ......................257
Fluid, Brake ..............................508
Fluid Capacities............................505
Fluid Leaks...............................248
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .................................467
Fluids And Lubricants .......................506
Fog Lights ................................75
Fold-Flat Seats .............................43
Forward Collision Warning....................189
Four-Way Hazard Flasher.....................392
Four
Wheel Drive .......................273, 285
Operation ..............................273
System ................................273
Four Wheel Drive Operation ..................273
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................428
Front Axle (Differential) ......................469
Fuel ....................................501
Adding ...............................359
Additives ..............................502
Clean Air ..............................502
Economy Mode ..........................264
Ethanol ...............................502
612 INDEX
Gasoline ...............................501
Light .................................155
Materials Added .........................502
Methanol ..............................502
Octane Rating ........................501, 506
Requirements ...........................501
Tank Capacity ...........................505
Fueling..................................359
Fuses ...................................405
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ...............114
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................502
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................501
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................502
Gear Ranges ..............................266
Glass Cleaning ............................495
Glove Compartment Storage...................120
Gross Axle Weight Rating.....................365
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................364
GVWR ..................................362
Hazard Warning Flashers .....................392
Headlights
Cleaning ...............................492
Delay ..................................74
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........73
Lights On Reminder .......................75
On With Wipers ..........................74
Passing ................................73
Switch .................................71
Washers ................................85
Headlight Washers ..........................85
Head Restraints ............................58
Head Rests ................................58
Heated Mirrors .............................70
Heated Seats...............................54
Heated Steering Wheel .....................63, 64
Heater, Engine Block ........................258
Hill Descent Control ........................176
Hill Descent Control Indicator .................176
Hill Start Assist ............................168
Hitches
T
railer Towing ...........................366
Hood
Closing ................................106
Opening ...............................106
Hood Prop ...............................106
Hood Release .............................106
Ignition ..................................25
12
INDEX 613
Switch .................................25
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................66, 392
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ............................160
Display ...............................136
Engine Oil Reset .........................138
Menu Items ............................141
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................495
Interior Appearance Care .....................494
Interior Lights..............................76
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............80
Introduction ................................4
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ........................18
Inverter
Power ................................129
iPod Control ..............................565
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................565
Bluetooth Streaming Audio .................565
Jacking Instructions .........................415
Jack Location .............................414
Jack Operation ......................413, 415, 470
Jump Starting .............................421
Key Fob
Arm The System ..........................34
Disarm The System ........................34
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........24, 32
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....22
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......24
Key-In Reminder............................27
Keyless Enter-N-Go..........................37
Passive Entry ............................37
Keys ....................................20
Replacement ..........................24, 32
Lane Change Assist ..........................76
LaneSense................................352
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................201
Latches..................................248
Hood .................................106
Lead Free Gasoline .........................501
Leaks, Fluid ..............................248
Life Of Tires ..............................482
Liftgate..................................107
Closing ................................108
Opening ...............................107
Power ................................109
Liftgate
Window Wiper/Washer .................84
614 INDEX
Light Bulbs ...............................248
Lights...................................248
AirBag.........................149, 212, 246
Ambient ................................78
Automatic Headlights ......................74
Brake Assist Warning ......................173
Brake Warning ..........................149
Bulb Replacement ........................398
Courtesy/Reading .........................77
Cruise .............................159, 161
Daytime Running .........................72
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...................79
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ......151
Exterior .............................71, 248
Fog ...................................75
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................392
Headlights On With Wipers ..................74
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..............72, 73
Hill Descent Control Indicator ...............176
Interior ................................76
Lights On Reminder .......................75
Low Fuel ..............................155
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........155
Map ..................................77
Park ...............................74, 160
Passing ................................73
Reading ................................77
Seat Belt Reminder .......................152
Security Alarm ..........................153
Service ................................398
Side Marker ............................401
Traction Control .........................173
Turn Signals ...................76, 160, 248, 401
Vanity Mirror ............................70
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .151, 160
Loading Vehicle............................362
Tires..................................476
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................146
Load Shed Battery Saver On...................146
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction.............146
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor .............146
Locks
Automatic
Door ........................41, 42
Child Protection ..........................42
Power Door .............................36
Lubrication, Body ..........................455
Luggage Carrier ...........................130
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................499
Maintenance...........................101, 105
12
INDEX 615
Maintenance Free Battery .....................445
Maintenance Schedule .......................437
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .155, 163
Manual
Service ................................606
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ................51
Memory Seat ..............................51
Methanol ................................502
Mirrors ..................................66
Automatic Dimming .......................66
Electric Remote ...........................68
Exterior Folding ..........................67
Heated .................................70
Outside ................................67
Rearview ............................66, 392
Vanity .................................70
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .................................6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................192
Mopar Parts ..............................605
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................72
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................259
Occupant Restraints.........................198
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .................501
Oil, Engine............................446, 506
Capacity ...............................505
Change Interval .........................446
Checking ..............................444
Disposal ...............................448
Filter ..............................448, 506
Filter Disposal ...........................448
Identification Logo .......................446
Materials Added To .......................447
Pressure Warning Light ....................152
Recommendation .....................446, 505
Synthetic ..............................447
Viscosity ........................446, 447, 505
Oil Filter, Change ..........................448
Oil Filter, Selection..........................448
Oil Pressure Light ..........................152
Oil
Reset.................................138
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................161
Operating Precautions .......................161
Operator Manual
Owner’s Manual .......................5,606
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................67
Overhead Console ..........................124
616 INDEX
Overheating, Engine ........................425
Paddle Shifters ............................270
Paint Care................................492
Parking Brake .............................260
ParkSense Active Park Assist ..................332
ParkSense System, Rear ...................313, 322
Passive Entry ..............................37
Personalized Main Menu .....................511
Pets ....................................244
Pinch Protection ........................101, 105
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........476
Power
Brakes ................................499
Distribution Center (Fuses) ..................407
Door Locks ..............................36
Inverter ...............................129
Mirrors ................................68
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............125
Seats ..................................49
Steering ...............................286
Sunroof .............................99, 102
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..............64
Windows ...............................96
Power Seats
Forward ................................49
Rearward ...............................49
Recline .................................50
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................207
Preparation For Jacking ......................414
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................207
Quadra-Lift...............................279
Quadra-Trac ..............................273
Radial Ply Tires ............................480
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............465
Radio Frequency
General Information ................25, 31, 33, 41
Radio Operation ...........................581
Radio Remote Controls ......................564
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...................82
Rear Axle (Differential) ......................469
Rear
Camera ..............................357
Rear Cross Path............................186
Rear Cupholders ...........................124
Rear ParkSense System ...................313, 322
Rearview Mirror ............................66
12
INDEX 617
Rear Wiper/Washer..........................84
Reclining Front Seats .........................45
Recreational Towing.........................376
Reformulated Gasoline.......................502
Refrigerant ...............................451
Release, Hood .............................106
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................200
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................28
Remote Keyless Entry ........................21
Arm The Alarm ..........................34
Disarm The Alarm ........................34
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........24, 32
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ...........564
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .....................30
Remote Starting System .......................28
Replacement Bulbs .........................398
Replacement Keys ........................24, 32
Replacement Tires ..........................482
Reporting Safety Defects .....................605
Restraints, Child ...........................225
Restraints, Head ............................58
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ..................112
Roll Over Warning ...........................5
Roof Luggage Rack .........................130
Rotation, Tires.............................489
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................246
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................248
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................605
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................245
Safety Information, Tire ......................471
Safety Tips ...............................245
Schedule, Maintenance.......................437
Seat Belt Reminder .........................152
Seat Belts .............................200, 246
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................205
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........205
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......205
Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........208
Child Restraints .........................225
Energy Management Feature ................207
Extender ...............................206
Front Seat .......................200, 201, 203
Inspection ..............................246
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................203
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................201
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............205
Operating Instructions .....................203
618 INDEX
Pregnant Women .........................207
Pretensioners ...........................207
Rear Seat ..............................201
Reminder ..............................200
Seat Belt Extender ........................206
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................207
Untwisting Procedure .....................205
Seat Belts Maintenance.......................494
Seats ...............................43, 49, 55
Adjustment ...........................43, 49
Easy Entry ..............................54
Head Restraints ..........................58
Heated ..............................54, 55
Rear Folding .............................43
Reclining ...............................45
Seatback Release ..........................43
Tilting .................................43
Vented .................................57
Ventilated ...............................57
Security Alarm ..........................33, 153
Arm The System ..........................34
Disarm The System ........................34
Selec-Terrain ..............................285
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............506
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................32
Sentry Key Replacement ....................24, 32
Service Assistance ..........................602
Service Contract ...........................604
Service Manuals ...........................606
Shifting .................................262
Automatic Transmission ................262, 264
Shoulder Belts.............................201
Signals, Turn .......................160, 248, 401
Siri.....................................594
SiriusXM Guardian
Vehicle Health Alert .......................592
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................488
Snow Plow ...............................375
Snow
Tires ...............................484
Spare Tires .....................414, 485, 486, 487
Spark Plugs ..............................506
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .........................291, 292
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...................299
Cancel ................................293
Resume ...............................293
Set...................................291
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..........290, 291, 293
12
INDEX 619
Starting ..............................253, 254
Button .................................25
Cold Weather ...........................258
Engine Block Heater ......................258
Engine Fails To Start ......................257
Remote ................................28
Starting And Operating ...................253, 254
Starting Procedures ......................253, 254
Steering
Power ................................286
Tilt Column ...........................63, 64
Wheel, Heated .........................63, 64
Wheel, Tilt ...........................63, 64
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................564
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .564
Storage ..................................120
Console ...............................122
Door .................................121
Glove Compartment ......................120
Sunglasses .............................130
Storage Bin ...............................111
Storage, Vehicle .........................94, 491
Storing Your Vehicle ........................491
Sunglasses Storage..........................130
Sun Roof .......................99, 101, 102, 105
Closing ............................100, 103
Opening ............................99, 103
Venting ............................101, 105
Sunshade Operation .....................100, 104
Sun Visor .................................71
Sway Control, Trailer ........................174
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................447
System, Remote Starting ......................28
Telescoping Steering Column ................63, 64
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............93
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ......................113
Tilt Steering Column ......................63, 64
Tire And Loading Information Placard............476
T
ire Markings .............................471
Tires..........................248, 477, 485, 490
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................482
Air Pressure ............................477
Chains ................................488
Changing .......................413, 421, 470
Compact Spare ..........................485
Flat Changing ...........................421
General Information ...................477, 485
High Speed .............................479
Inflation Pressure ........................478
620 INDEX
Jacking ............................413, 470
Life Of Tires ............................482
Load Capacity ...........................476
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........156, 192
Quality Grading .........................490
Radial ................................480
Replacement .........................421, 482
Rotation ...............................489
Safety .............................471, 477
Sizes .................................472
Snow Tires .............................484
Spare Tires ...................414, 485, 486, 487
Spinning ...............................481
Trailer Towing ...........................371
Tread Wear Indicators .....................481
Wheel Mounting .........................421
Wheel Nut Torque ........................499
Tire Safety Information.......................471
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................369
To Open Hood ............................106
Tow Hooks
Emergency .............................432
Towing ..............................364, 430
Disabled Vehicle .........................430
Guide .................................367
Recreational ............................376
Weight ................................367
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..................376
Traction Control ...........................171
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ....................174
Trailer Towing.............................364
Cooling System Tips ......................375
Hitches ................................366
Minimum Requirements ....................370
Tips ..................................374
T
railer And Tongue Weight ..................369
Wiring ................................373
Trailer Towing Guide ........................367
Trailer Weight .............................367
Transfer Case .............................470
Fluid .................................508
Maintenance ............................470
Transmission ..............................264
Automatic ..........................264, 468
Fluid .................................508
Maintenance ............................468
Shifting ...............................262
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (Homelink).......114
Transporting Pets ..........................244
Tread Wear Indicators .......................481
12
INDEX 621
Trip Computer ............................148
Turn Signals ........................76, 160, 401
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .............37
Passive Entry Programming ..................37
Uconnect Voice Command ....................582
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................490
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)........114
Universal Transmitter........................114
Unleaded Gasoline .........................501
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................205
Vanity Mirrors .............................70
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............498
Vehicle Loading............................362
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................6
Vehicle Storage..........................94, 491
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ...........................18
Navigation ..............................18
Operating Instructions ......................18
Searching User Guide ......................18
Viscosity, Engine Oil .....................446, 447
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................582
Warning Flashers, Hazard ....................392
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .154
Warnings And Cautions .......................6
Warnings, Roll Over ..........................5
Warranty Information .......................605
Washers, Headlight ..........................85
Washers, Windshield......................79, 444
Washing Vehicle ...........................493
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................487
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................487
Wind Buffeting ......................98, 100, 104
Window Fogging ...........................94
Windows
Power .................................96
Windshield Defroster ........................246
Windshield Washers ......................79, 444
Fluid .................................444
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................456
Windshield Wipers ..........................
79
Wipers Blade Replacement ....................456
Wipers, Intermittent .........................80
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ........................82
622 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Grand Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
2019 Grand Cherokee
Second Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
19WK-126-AB
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2019
